Astra: Owner's Manual

Owners Manual
ASTRA
Operation, Safety and Maintenance
Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.
A ST R A
Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not
permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors
Ltd.
All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly
reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this
manual are based on the latest production information
available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without
notice.
Edition: July 2007.
TS 1612-A-08
Contents Commitment to customer
satisfaction:
In brief ....................................................... 2
Keys, doors, windows, TwinTop ........... 30
Our aim: to keep you happy with your Seats, interior .......................................... 64
vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers Instruments, controls ............................ 112
offer first-class service at competitive Lighting ................................................. 143
prices. Experienced, factory-trained Infotainment system ............................ 151
technicians work according to factory Climate control .................................... 154
instructions. Your Authorised Repairer can Driving and operation ......................... 176
supply you with GENUINE VAUXHALL- Self-help, vehicle care .......................... 241
APPROVED PARTS, which have undergone
Service, maintenance .......................... 294
stringent quality and precision checks, and
of course useful and attractive Technical data .................................... 308
VAUXHALL-APPROVED ACCESSORIES. Index ...................................................... 352
Our name is your guarantee!
For details of the
Vauxhall Authorised Repairer Network,
please ring this number; 0845 090 2044
2 In brief
In brief
To unlock and open the vehicle: To unlock and open the vehicle
Press button q, pull door handle with the Open&Start System 3:
6 Door locks see page 49, Bring electronic key into the
keys see page 30, reception area of the vehicle,
electronic immobiliser see page 31, pull handle
remote control see page 32, 6 Open&Start System 3 see page 34.
central locking system see page 40,
anti-theft locking system 3 see page 41,
Vauxhall alarm system 3 see page 46,
TwinTop roof operation 3 see page 56,
child safety locks see page 49.
In brief 3
To unlock and open the luggage To adjust front seat: Adjust front seat backrests:
compartment: Pull handle, slide seat, Turn handwheel
Press button q on remote control, release handle Move backrest to suit seating position.
or for the Open&Start System 3: 6 Seat see page 64, Do not lean on seat backrest whilst
Bring electronic key into the seat position see page 67. adjusting it.
reception area of the vehicle,
pull button below handle 9 Warning 6 Seats see page 64,
seat position see page 67,
6 Open&Start-System 3 see page 34, fold front passenger seat backrest
Important: Do not sit nearer than 10
remote control see page 32, see pages 66, 75.
inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to
permit safe airbag deployment.
Vauxhall alarm system 3 see page 46.
4 In brief
To adjust front seat height 3: To adjust front seat inclination 3: Tip the front seat backrests
Operate lever on outboard side Pull inner lever on front of seat, forward 3:
of seat adjust inclination, release lever, Lift release lever,
Pump action on lever engage seat in position tilt backrest forward,
Up: Seat higher Adjust the inclination by distributing body lower release lever,
Down: Seat lower weight. seat back is engaged
in tilted position 3,
6 Seat see page 64, 6 Seat see page 64, slide seat forwards 3
seat position see page 67. seat position see page 67.
To straighten the seat, slide back and it
engages in its original position 3. Raise
release lever 3, straighten backrest, lower
release lever, backrest engages.
The backrest can only be tipped forwards
from an upright position.
Panoramic windscreen 3: before folding
the seat, push the head restraints down
and close the sun visors.
6 Seats see page 64,
fold front passenger seat backrest
see pages 66, 75.
In brief 5
To adjust head restraint height of To fit seat belt: Adjusting interior mirror:
front and rear outboard seats: Draw seat belt smoothly Swivel mirror housing
Press button to release, from inertia reel, Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing
adjust height, guide over shoulder and to reduce dazzle at night.
engage in position engage in buckle 6 Mirrors see page 49,
6 Head restraints see page 68, The entire length of the seat belt must be automatic dipping interior mirror
head restraint position see page 69, twist-free. The lap belt must lie closely see page 51.
adjust rear centre head restraint against the body. The seat backrests must
see page 68, not be tilted too far backwards (maximum
head restraint removal see page 69. recommended tilting angle approx. 25).
To release belt, press red button on belt
buckle.
6 Three-point seat belts see page 85,
airbag system see page 92,
seat position see page 67.
6 In brief
To adjust exterior mirrors Electrical exterior mirrors 3 Steering column lock and ignition:
manually: adjust: Turn key to position 1;
From inside, swivel lever in Four-way switch in drivers door disengage steering column lock
required direction Press right or left mirror switch: four-way by moving steering wheel slightly
6 Mirrors see page 49, switch controls the appropriate mirror. Positions:
aspherically curved exterior mirror Centre position: no adjustment. 0 = Ignition off
see page 49, 6 Mirrors see page 49, 1 = Steering free, ignition off
folding exterior mirror see page 50, aspherically curved exterior mirror 2 = Ignition on, with diesel engine:
heated exterior mirror see page 157. see page 49, preheating
folding exterior mirror see page 50, 3 = Starting
heated exterior mirror see page 157.
6 Starting see page 17,
electronic immobiliser see page 31,
parking the vehicle see page 18.
In brief 7
Steering column lock and ignition Steering wheel adjustment: Turn light switch:
on vehicles with Open&Start Move lever down, 7 = Off
system 3: adjust height and distance, 8 = Parking lights
Make sure electronic key is in the move lever up, engage
interior reception range and press Adjust steering wheel only when vehicle is
9 = Dipped beam or main
the Start/Stop button; stationary and steering column lock is beam
disengage the steering column released. AUTO = Automatic dipped
lock by moving the steering wheel 6 Airbag System see page 92. beam activation 3
slightly Press button:
To start the vehicle, also operate brake or
clutch pedal.
> = Fog lights 3
r = Fog tail light
To activate the steering column lock,
switch ignition off by pressing the Start/ 6 Lighting see page 143,
Stop button, open drivers door and headlight control indicator
engage steering wheel. Do not allow see pages 18, 140.
vehicle to move while doing this.
6 Starting see page 17,
parking the vehicle see page 18.
8 In brief
In brief 9
Page Page Page

1 Side air vents .................................. 156 7 Remote control on steering 14 Accelerator pedal.................. 198, 199
2 Front passenger airbag .................. 93 wheel 3 ........................................... 151 15 Brake pedal ........................... 199, 223
3 Centre air vents ............................. 156 8 Instruments ..................................... 112 16 Clutch pedal 3 ............................... 199
4 Central information display for 9 Horn .................................................. 12 17 Steering wheel adjustment ............... 7
time, date, outside temperature, Drivers Airbag ................................ 93
18 Start/stop button 3 .................. 17, 34
Infotainment system 3, 10 Windscreen wiper,
Check control 3 .............................. 138 windscreen wash system, 19 Ashtray 3 ....................................... 108
Trip computer 3 .....................128, 134 headlight wash Cigarette lighter 3 ........................ 107
Climate control system 3 ............. 168 system 3 and rear window 20 Climate control ............................. 154
5 Heated seat (left) 3 ...................... 157 wash system .......................12, 13, 141
21 Infotainment system 3 ................. 151
Deflation detection system 3 ....... 218 11 Parking lights, dipped beam ........ 143
Tyre pressure Instrument illumination ................. 148 22 Glove compartment ....... 37, 110, 156
monitoring system 3 ...................... 219 Fog tail light ................................... 145
Parking distance sensor 3 ............ 215 Fog lights 3 .................................... 145
Hazard warning lights ..................... 11 Headlight range adjustment 3 .... 146
Central locking system .................... 42 12 Unlocking the bonnet .................... 241
SPORT mode 3 ............................... 212
Heated seat (right) 3 ................... 157 13 Starter switch with immobiliser ........ 6
and
6 Turn signal light ............................... 11 sensor panel for emergency
Headlight flash, operation Open&Start system 3 .... 37
Dipped beam, high beam ............... 11
Door-to-door light function 3 ........ 148
Cruise control 3 ............................. 213
10 In brief
Control indicators A Engine electronics, gearbox T Winter programme of

0 Open&Start system, fault, electronics 3, immobiliser, automatic transmission 3 or
see pages 34, 112. diesel fuel filter 3, fault, Easytronic 3,
see pages 31, 115, 182, 188, see pages 180, 186, 193.
I Engine oil pressure, 196, 206.
see page 113. 1 SPORT mode of automatic
j Easytronic 3, start engine 3, transmission 3 or Easytronic 3,
R Brake system, clutch system, see pages 115, 177. see pages 179, 185, 192.
see pages 114, 223, 302.
IDS+ Continuous Damping Control 3, y Seat occupancy recognition 3,
v Airbag systems, belt tensioners, SPORT mode 3, see page 99.
deployable anti-roll bars 3, see pages 212, 213.
see pages 87, 98, 104. Z Exhaust emission 3,
S Engine oil level 3, see pages 117, 206.
v Electronic Stability Programme see pages 116, 298.
(ESPPlus) 3, u Anti-lock Brake System,
see page 210. 8 Exterior lights, see page 225.
see pages 116, 143.
X Seat belt 3, ! Preheating system 3,
see pages 88, 114. r Parking distance sensor 3, diesel particle filter 3,
see page 215. see page 118.
Q Open doors and luggage
compartment, O Turn signal lights, w Deflation detection system 3,
see page 115. see pages 11, 116. tyre pressure monitoring
system 3,
p Alternator, Y Fuel level, see pages 118, 219, 221.
see page 115. see pages 116, 119, 202.
B Adaptive Forward Lighting
W Coolant temperature, > Fog lights 3, (AFL) 3, fault,
see pages 115, 300. see pages 117, 145. see pages 147, 150.
C Main beam, m Cruise control 3,
see pages 11, 117. see page 214.
r Fog tail light,
see pages 117, 145.
In brief 11
Headlight flash, main beam and Switch on turn signal lights: Hazard warning lights:
dipped beam: Right = Move stalk up On = Press
Headlight = Pull stalk Left = Move stalk down Off = Press again
flash toward steering
wheel 6 Turn signal lights see page 144. 6 Hazard warning lights see page 146.
Main beam = Push stalk
forward
Dipped beam = Push stalk
forward again
or pull toward
steering wheel
6 Main beam, headlight flash
see page 144.
12 In brief
Activate horn: Windscreen wiper: Automatic wiping with

Press j in centre of steering Move stalk up slightly rain sensor 3:
wheel = Off Move stalk up slightly
6 Airbag system see page 93, $ = Timed interval wipe $ = Automatic wiping with
remote control on steering wheel 3 rain sensor
see page 151. % = Slow
& = Fast = Off
Move stalk down from position : Single 6 Windscreen wiper see page 141,
swipe. wiper blades see pages 303, 304,
vehicle care see page 291.
6 Windscreen wiper see page 141,
adjustable wiper interval 3 see page 141,
wiper blades see pages 303, 304,
vehicle care see page 291.
In brief 13
Operating windscreen and Activate rear screen wiper 3 and Heated rear window,
headlight wash systems 3: wash system 3: heated exterior mirrors:
Pull stalk toward steering wheel Wiper on = Push stalk On = Press
6 Windscreen and headlight wash systems forward Off = Press again
see page 142,
further notes see pages 291,303
Wiper off = Push stalk 6 Air conditioning see page 154,
forward again heated rear window see page 157.
Wash = Hold stalk
pushed fully
forward
6 Rear screen wiper and wash system see
page 142,
further notes see pages 291, 303.
14 In brief
To demist or defrost windows: Set automatic mode on climate Manual transmission:

Set air distribution to l, control system 3: Reverse: with the vehicle stationary,
rotary switch for temperature Press AUTO, 3 seconds after de-clutching pull the
and air flow clockwise; pre-select temperature button up on the selector lever and engage
Air conditioning system 3: with rotary switch, gear.
also press button n; open air vents If the gear does not engage, set the lever in
Automatic air conditioning 6 Climate control system 3 see page 168. neutral, release the clutch pedal and
system 3: depress again; then repeat gear selection.
press buttons n and V,
turn rotary switch for
temperature clockwise,
air flow to A;
Climate control system 3:
press button V
6 Climate control system 3 see page 154.
In brief 15
To exit P, switch ignition on, operate

footbrake and press button on selector
lever.
Press button on selector lever to engage P
or R.
P Only when vehicle is stationary, first
apply handbrake
R Only when vehicle is stationary
6 Automatic transmission 3
see page 184.
Easytronic 3: Automatic transmission 3:

N = Idling P = Park position.
o = Drive position R = Reverse gear.
+ = Higher gear N = Neutral
- = Lower gear (idle)
A/M = Switch between D = Automatic gear selection
Automatic and Manual 3 = 1st to 3rd gear
mode 2 = 1st and 2nd gear
R = Reverse gear 1 = 1st gear
(with selector lever lock)
P or N must be engaged when starting.
Always move selector lever as far as it will
go in the chosen direction.
It automatically returns to the centre
position after every operation. Observe
gear/mode indicator in transmission
display.
The footbrake must be depressed when
starting.
6 Easytronic 3 see page 176.
16 In brief
To move from P or N, switch on ignition, Before starting off, check:

depress footbrake and press button on z Tyre pressure and tyre condition
selector lever. see pages 227, 337.
To select P or R, press button on selector z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine
lever. compartment see pages 298 to 305.
P Only when vehicle is stationary, first
apply handbrake z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting
and number plates are free from dirt,
R Only when vehicle is stationary
snow and ice and operational.
6 Automatic transmission with
z Do not place any objects in front of the
ActiveSelect 3 see page 190.
rear window, on the instrument panel or
in the area in which the airbags inflate.
z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are
correctly adjusted.
Automatic transmission with
ActiveSelect 3: z Brake function.
P = Park position
R = Reverse gear
N = Neutral
(idle)
D = Automatic gear selection
Selector lever in D to left:
Manual mode
+ = Higher gear
- = Lower gear
P or N must be engaged when starting.
In brief 17
Press button again to repeat the starting

procedure or switch off the engine.
To turn on the ignition, do not press the
brake or clutch pedal; just press the button
briefly.
Do not start unless vehicle is stationary.
6 Open&Start-System 3 see page 34,
diesel fuel system see page 242.
To start engine: To start engine with Open&Start

Operate clutch and brake, system 3:
automatic transmission 3 The electronic key must be inside
in P or N, reception area inside the car,
Easytronic 3: Depress brake, operate clutch or brake,
do not accelerate; automatic transmission 3
Petrol engine: Turn key to 3; in P or N,
Diesel engine: Turn key to 2, Easytronic 3: Depress brake,
when control indicator ! do not accelerate;
goes out1) turn key to 3; Petrol engine: Press button;
release key once engine Diesel engine: Briefly press
is running button, when control indicator !
Before restarting or switching off the goes out1) press button again
engine, turn key back to 0. for 1 second;
To switch on the ignition, only turn the release button once engine
key to 2. is running
6 Electronic immobiliser see page 31,
diesel fuel system see page 242.
1)
Preheating system switches on only if outside
temperature is low.
18 In brief
Parking the vehicle z If the vehicle is on a level surface or an

z Always apply handbrake without incline, with manual transmission or
pressing release button. Apply as firmly Easytronic 3 select first gear before
as possible on a downhill slop or uphill switching the ignition off, with automatic
slope. Operate footbrake at same time transmission 3 move selector lever to P.
to reduce operating force. Also turn wheels away from kerb on an
uphill slope.
z Switch engine off by turning ignition key
to 0. Remove ignition key and turn If the vehicle is on a downhill slope, with
steering wheel until steering lock is felt to manual transmission or Easytronic 3
engage (anti-theft protection). With select reverse gear before turning
Open&Start system 3 switch ignition off the ignition off, with automatic
and open drivers door. transmission 3 move selector lever to P.
Also turn front wheels toward kerb.
In vehicles with Open&Start system 3 the
engine can only be switched off when the z Lock doors and luggage compartment
Releasing the handbrake: vehicle is stationary. using button p on remote control and
Raise lever slightly, with Open&Start system 3 touch sensor
press release button, In vehicles with automatic transmission 3 in door handle of front door.
the key can only be withdrawn when the
lower lever fully selector lever is in position P. With the To activate the anti-theft locking
6 Handbrake see page 224. Open&Start System 3, "P" flashes in the system 3 and the Vauxhall alarm
gear display for several seconds if P is system 3 press button p twice or with
not selected or the handbrake is not Open&Start system 3 touch sensor in one
applied. of the front door handles twice.
In brief 19
Advice when parking: That was the most important

z Do not park the vehicle on an easy information in brief for your first
flammable surface. The high temperature drive in your vehicle.
of the exhaust system could ignite the
surface.
z On vehicles with Easytronic 3 control
indicator R flashes for a few seconds
after the ignition is switched off if the The other pages of this chapter
handbrake has not been applied contain a summary of the
see page 182. noteworthy functions of your
z Close the windows and sunroof 3 or vehicle.
TwinTop 3.
z The engine cooling fans may run after
the engine has been switched off
see page 297.
The remaining chapters of the
6 Remote control see page 32, Owners Manual contain
Open&Start system see page 34, important information on
Vauxhall alarm system 3 see page 46,
operation, safety and
TwinTop roof operation 3 see page 56, maintenance as well as a
parking up the vehicle see page 307. complete index.
20 In brief
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system Side airbag system 3 Curtain airbag system 3
The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system The side airbag is triggered in the event of The curtain airbag system triggers in case
consists of several separate systems. a side-on collision to form a safety cushion of a side-on collision and provides a safety
for the driver or front passenger in the barrier in the head area on the respective
Front airbag system respective door area. This substantially side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of
The front airbag system will be triggered in reduces the risk of injury to the upper body injury to the head considerably in case of a
the event of a serious accident involving a and pelvis. side-on collision.
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The 6 Vauxhall Full Size airbag system
forward movement of the driver and front see page 92.
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body and head
thereby substantially reduced.
In brief 21
Active headrests 3 on front seats Operating menus in the Selection using multi-function button 3:
In the event of a rear-end impact, the information display 3 rotate and press multi-function button.
active head restraints tilt forward a little. Menu options are selected using menus To exit a menu, turn the multi-function
The head is more effectively supported by and the arrow keys or the multi-function button left or right to Return or Main and
the head restraint and the danger of button on the Infotainment system 3 or the select.
whiplash in the neck area is reduced. left-hand adjuster wheel 3 on the steering
Active head restraints are identified by the wheel. The selected menu options are
lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint shown on the display.
guide sleeves. Selection using arrow keys 3:
6 Headrests see page 68. Operate left or right arrow key.
22 In brief
2 Board Computer 19,5 19:36

BC 1 All values
BC 2
257.0 Coolant level
1
miles
Timer
40 mph check
Tyres
7.0
8
gal
31.0 mpg OK
Selection with left adjuster wheel on Trip computer 3 Check control 3

steering wheel 3: rotate adjuster wheel The trip computers provide information on The check control software monitors
and press. driving data, which is continually recorded z Fluid levels
6 Information Display see page 122. and evaluated electronically.
z Tyre pressure 3
Functions:
z Range z Remote control battery
z Instantaneous consumption z Vauxhall alarm system 3
z Distance travelled
z Average speed z Important exterior lights, including
z Effective consumption cables and fuses
z Average consumption 6 Check Control 3 see page 138.
z Stop watch
z Tyre pressure 3
6 Trip computer 3 see pages 128, 134.
In brief 23
Two headphone connections are available,

with separate volume controls.
Further information is available in the
infotainment system operating
instructions.
6 Twin Audio 3 see page 152.
Remote control on steering Twin Audio 3

wheel 3 Twin Audio allows rear seat occupants the
The functions of the infotainment system 3 choice between the audio source played on
and the information display can be the infotainment system or a separate
operated with the buttons and adjuster audio source.
wheels on the steering wheel. Only an audio source that is not currently
Further information is available in the active on the infotainment system can be
infotainment system operating controlled using Twin Audio.
instructions.
6 Remote control on steering wheel 3
see page 151,
Infotainment System see page 151.
24 In brief
Damping and steering become more direct

and provide better contact with the road
surface. The engine reacts more quickly to
accelerator movements.
With Easytronic 3 and automatic
transmission 3, the shift times are
shortened and shifting takes place at
higher revs (not with cruise control
enabled 3).
6 Sport mode 3 see page 212.
Open&Start system with Sport mode 3

electronic key and remote To activate
control 3 Press the SPORT button. The LED in the
The Open&Start system allows the vehicle button illuminates.
to be locked and unlocked, including SPORT mode is used to change damping 3,
anti-theft locking system 3 and the steering 3, throttle application and the
Vauxhall alarm system 3 without a shift point for Easytronic 3 and automatic
mechanical key and the engine to be transmission 3 while driving.
started and stopped using a start/stop
button. All the driver has to do is carry the
electronic key around with him.
6 Open&Start System 3 see page 34.
In brief 25
2 Board Computer
BC 1
BC 2
Timer
Tyres
Deflation Detection System After tyre pressure is corrected or a tyre or Tyre pressure monitoring
(DDS) 3 wheel is changed, the system must be system 3
The deflation detection system initialised by pressing the DDS button. The tyre pressure monitoring system
continuously monitors the speed of all 6 Tyre deflation detection system 3 continually checks the pressure and speed
wheels while driving. If a tyre loses see page 218. of all four wheels while driving.
pressure, it grows smaller and therefore A pressure sensor is installed in each wheel.
rotates more quickly than the other wheels. The inflation pressures of the individual
If the system detects a difference in speed, wheels are transmitted to a controller,
the control indicator w illuminates in red. where they are compared.
The current tyre pressures can be
displayed on the graphical information
display or the colour information display 3.
Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in
the form of messages on the information
display whilst driving.
6 Tyre pressure monitoring system 3
see page 218.
26 In brief
Adaptive Forward Lighting Curve lighting Panoramic windscreen 3

(AFL) 3 The Xenon light beam pivots based on
To open:
improves lighting in curves (curve lighting) steering wheel position and speed
Turn the handle to the right and move the
on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlight (from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h).
roof lining rearward to a suitable position.
system. Motorway lighting
To close:
At higher speeds and continuous straight
Move the roof lining forward to a suitable
ahead travel, the dipped beam
position. When moved all the way forward,
automatically raises slightly, thereby
the roof lining engages in position.
increasing headlight range.
6 Panoramic roof 3 see page 53.
6 Adaptive driving lights 3 see page 147.
In brief 27
Parking distance sensor 3 Cargo box 3 FlexOrganizer 3

When reverse gear is selected, the parking Collapsible box to divide the luggage The side walls contain retaining strips,
distance sensor switches itself on compartment. where various components can be
automatically. The cargo box may only be loaded when attached to divide the luggage
The parking distance sensor can also be the backrests are engaged in an upright compartment or fasten loads.
activated at speeds of less than 15 mph position. The system consists of
(25 km/h) by pressing the r button on When removing, start with the right half. z Adapters
the instrument panel. z Variable partition net
6 Cargo Box 3 see page 81. z Mesh pockets for the side walls
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when
reversing, a series of signals can be heard z Hooks in the luggage compartment
in the vehicle interior. The interval between 6 FlexOrganizer 3 see page 80.
the signals becomes shorter as the
distance is reduced. If the distance is less
than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous.
6 Parking distance sensor 3
see page 215.
28 In brief
The roof is operated with the buttons on

the roof console above the mirror or with
the remote control.
To improve luggage compartment
accessibility, the electric loading aid makes
it possible to raise the open roof when it is
stowed in the luggage compartment.
6 TwinTop see page 56.
Luggage compartment cover, Astra TwinTop

Estate With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra
To open: unites the benefits of a coupe with those of
Press handle on luggage compartment a convertible.
cover down. The cover automatically To optimise safety, the Astra TwinTop is
unrolls. equipped with a rollover protection system
6 Luggage compartment cover 3 with reinforced windscreen frame and the
see page 76. choice of fixed or deployable anti-roll bars
in addition to the front and side airbag
systems.
In brief 29
Diesel particle filter 3

The diesel particle filter system removes
polluting soot particles out of the engine
exhaust gases. The system includes a
self-cleaning function that operates
automatically while driving. The filter is
cleaned by burning the trapped soot
particles at a high temperature. There may
be an increase in fuel consumption,
exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan
operation 3 during the self-cleaning
operation.
The self-cleaning function cannot operate
automatically during certain driving
situations where the engine does not reach If the filter needs cleaning and recent
its normal operating temperature. An driving situations did not allow the function
example of this would be short distance to automatically operate, then the control
driving in cold weather. indicator ! will flash. If this occurs, then
you may continue to drive the vehicle
normally. The vehicle will not be damaged
and does not require service.
The self-cleaning function will
automatically operate while driving after
the engine has reached its normal
operating temperature. The control
indicator ! will continue to flash until the
self-cleaning operation is complete. This
may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The
time will be shorter at higher vehicle
speeds.
6 diesel particle filter page 207.
30 Keys, doors, windows, TwinTop
Keys, doors, windows, Replacement keys

The key number is specified in the vehicle
TwinTop documents and in the Car Pass 3.
The key is a constituent of the electronic
immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall
Authorised repairer guarantees problem-
free operation of the electronic
immobiliser.
When electronic keys of the Open&Start
system are being replaced, all keys must be
handed to the dealer for programming.
Replacement keys ............................... 30
Car Pass................................................ 30 Keep the spare key in a safe spot.
outboardKey with foldaway key Locks see page 291,
section 3 ............................................ 30 Open&Start system, electronic keys outboardKey with foldaway key
Electronic immobiliser.......................... 31 see page 34. section 3
Store personal vehicle settings in Press button to extend. Press button to
the vehicle key 3 ............................... 32 Car Pass retract; key section engages audibly.
Remote control 3 with mechanical The Car Pass contains all of the vehicles
key ...................................................... 32 data and should therefore not be kept in
Open&Start system 3 .......................... 34 the vehicle.
Central locking system ........................ 40 Have your Car Pass on hand when
Fault when locking or unlocking......... 43 consulting a Vauxhall Authorised repairer.
Luggage compartment....................... 44
Vauxhall alarm system 3.................... 46
Child safety locks 3 ............................. 49
Exterior mirrors..................................... 49
Interior mirror ....................................... 51
Electric windows 3............................... 51
Panoramic windscreen 3 .................... 53
Sunroof 3 ............................................. 54
TwinTop................................................ 56
Keys, doors, windows, TwinTop 31
Electronic immobiliser Control indicator for immobiliser A If control indicator A illuminates after
The system checks whether the vehicle may Control indicator A illuminates briefly the engine is started, there is a fault in
be started with the mechanical key or when the ignition is switched on. the engine electronics or transmission
electronic key of the Open&Start system 3 If the control indicator flashes when the electronics 3 (see pages 182, 188,
that is being used. If the key is recognised ignition is on, there is a fault in the system; 196, 206) or there is water in the diesel fuel
as "authorised" the vehicle can be started. the engine cannot be started. Switch off filter 3 (see page 300).
The check takes place via a transponder in the ignition and then repeat the start Note
the key. attempt. The immobiliser does not lock the doors.
The electronic immobiliser activates itself If the control indicator A continues to Therefore, after leaving the vehicle always
automatically after the key has been flash, try to start the engine using the lock it and switch on the Vauxhall alarm
removed from the ignition or, with the second key and contact a workshop for system 3 see pages 40, 46.
Open&Start system 3, when the engine is assistance.
switched off by pressing the Start/Stop
button.
The code number of the electronic
immobiliser is given in the Car Pass.
Store personal vehicle settings in

the vehicle key 3
The last settings selected
z instrument illumination,
z information display 3,
z Infotainment system 3,
z for the climate control system 3
are stored automatically depending on the
vehicle key used.
Different settings stored for each vehicle
key are retrieved automatically on use of
the vehicle key concerned.
Each time the vehicle is locked, the settings Remote control 3 with mechanical On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can be
are saved again. key opened or closed using the remote
Depending on vehicle equipment level, one control 3.
of the remote controls shown on this page
will be used.
Remote control in version with Open&Start
system 3 see page 34.
The remote control is integrated in the key.
Used to operate:
z central locking system,
z mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,
z Vauxhall alarm system 3.
The remote control has a range of approx. Fault z If the central locking system is
5 metres. This range can be affected by If the central locking system cannot be overloaded as a result of repeated
outside influences. Aim the remote control operated with the remote control, it may be operation at short intervals. The power
at the vehicle to operate. due to the following: supply is cut off for a brief period.
Handle the remote control with care, z The range of the remote control has z Interference from higher-power radio
protect it from moisture and high been exceeded. waves from other sources.
temperatures and avoid unnecessary z Remote control battery voltage is too To eliminate the cause of a fault, we
operation. low. Battery replacement see next recommend contacting a workshop for
The hazard warning lights come on to page. assistance.
indicate that the remote control is z Frequent, repeated operation of the Open drivers door with key see page 43.
operational. remote control outside the reception
Central locking system, range of the vehicle (e.g. too far from
see page 40. vehicle, remote control is then no longer
Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3, recognised). Remote control
see page 41. synchronisation see next column.
Vauxhall alarm system 3,

see page 46.
Electric windows 3,
see page 51.
Astra TwinTop,
see page 56.
Key with fixed key section

Have the battery changed by a workshop.
Remote control synchronisation
After replacing the battery, unlock door
with key in lock, see page 43. The remote
control is synchronised by switching the
ignition on.
Remote control battery replacement Open&Start system 3

Replace the battery as soon as the range The Open&Start system allows the vehicle
of the remote control begins to shrink. to be locked and unlocked, including
Key with foldaway key section operation of the anti-theft locking
Fold out key bit, see page 30. system 3 and the Vauxhall alarm
system 3, and also allows the engine to be
Open remote control. Replace battery,
switched on and off without a mechanical
battery type, see page 345, paying
key. All the driver has to do is carry the
attention to installation position. Close
electronic key around with him.
remote control.
On the Astra TwinTop, the roof can also be
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
opened or closed with the remote control 3
in accordance with environmental
of the electronic key.
protection regulations.
If the brake or clutch pedal is depressed,

the engine can be started right away with
a single press on the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the Start/Stop button interrupts
the starting procedure.
The engine and the ignition are switched
off by pressing the Start/Stop button again.
The vehicle must be stationary. The
immobiliser is activated at the same time.
If the ignition has been switched off and
the vehicle is stationary, the steering wheel
lock activates automatically when the
drivers door is opened or closed.
The electronic key must be within the When the Start/Stop button is pressed, the The electronic key must be within the
external reception range about 1 metre system re-checks the authorisation. The interior reception in order to switch the
from the vehicle in order to lock and unlock electronic key has to be recognised in the ignition on or off. We recommend that the
the vehicle. interior in order to do this. After the key has driver carries the electronic key on his or
If the electronic key is recognized as been authorised the ignition switches on. her person. If the electronic key is not
"authorised", the vehicle can be unlocked At the same time, the electronic recognised, try a different position for
by pulling a door handle or the knob immobiliser is switched off and the electro- the key.
beneath the tailgate handle and the doors mechanical steering column lock is
Do not put the electronic key in the
and the tailgate can be opened. deactivated. Pressing the Start/Stop button
luggage compartment or in front of the
again with the brake or clutch pedal
information display.
depressed or in P or N with automatic
transmission 3 starts the engine. Press the
6
button for at least one second with the
vehicle stationary or hold until the engine
starts.
The remote control has a range of approx.

5 metres. This range can be affected by
outside influences. Aim the remote control
at the vehicle to operate.
Handle the remote control with care,
protect it from moisture and high
temperatures and avoid unnecessary
operation.
The hazard warning lights come on to
indicate that the remote control is
operational.
Central locking system,
see page 40.
The vehicle is locked from the outside with Remote control Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,
the doors closed by touching the sensor The vehicle can be locked and unlocked by see page 41.
panel in the door handle of one of the front in the usual way using the remote control
Vauxhall alarm system 3,
doors. The electronic key must be within with the buttons on the electronic key.
see page 46.
the external reception range of In addition, the anti-theft locking system
approximately one metre from the vehicle. Electric windows 3,
and Vauxhall alarm system can be armed
see page 51.
The Open&Start system 3 does not the lock and disabled using the remote control.
the vehicle automatically if the electronic Astra TwinTop,
key is outside the external reception range see page 56.
of approximately 1 metre from the vehicle.
InSP3 in the service display or an

appropriate message in the information 3
display indicates that the battery of the
electronic key needs replacing, see
page 39.
If the control indicator 0 illuminates
continuously, an error has occurred in the
system. Lock or unlock vehicle using the
remote control or the emergency key if
necessary, see page 43, or try using the
spare key.
If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that
the steering column lock is still locked:
move steering wheel to and fro a little and
Control indicator for Open&Start press Start/Stop button again. Emergency operation
system 0 If the Open&Start system fails or the
If the control indicator flashes 0 with the If 0 illuminates while driving, there is a electronic key (control indicator 0 flashes
ignition switched on or with the engine system fault. Contact a workshop or illuminates continuously) the drivers
running an operating error has occurred, immediately. door can be locked or unlocked with the
e.g. the electronic key is no longer within Emergency operation, see page 37. emergency key in the electronic key: press
the reception range of the vehicle interior. locking mechanism on underside and
Lockable glovebox, Astra TwinTop with
During the next starting procedure the remove cap toward the front by applying
Open&Start system 3
engine may not be able to be started. Press gentle pressure to the cap. Push
In addition to the electronic key of the
Start/Stop key slightly longer to switch the emergency key towards the outside over
Open&Start system, there is a standard key
ignition off. the detent and remove.
without remote control for the glove
Flashing of the 0 can also be an indication compartment lock. 6
of complete failure of the electronic key. In
this case operation is only possible using
the emergency facility, see page 37.
Only the drivers door can be locked and To start the engine, hold electronic key in The press start/stop button.
unlocked using the emergency key. Unlock marked position, operate brake or clutch Press start/stop button for at least 1 second
the entire vehicle as described on page 43. pedal or with automatic transmission 3 to switch the engine off. Lock all doors
In the version with Vauxhall alarm operate brake pedal and select P or N. except drivers door as described on
system 3 the alarm may be triggered when page 43. Unlock drivers door with
the vehicle is unlocked. Switch ignition on emergency key.
to deactivate alarm and release the
steering column lock: hold electronic key at This facility is for emergency use only.
marked position on the steering column Replace the battery of the electronic key as
panelling and press the Start/Stop button. soon as possible or have the system
Repeat procedure if necessary. repaired. Contact a workshop for
assistance.
z Remote control battery voltage too low

refer to text in previous columns for
instructions on how to change battery.
z Frequent, repeated operation of the
remote control outside the reception
range (e.g. too far from vehicle, remote
control is then no longer recognised).
z If the central locking system is
overloaded as a result of repeated
operation at short intervals. The power
supply is cut off for a brief period.
z Interference from higher-power radio
waves from other sources.
Replacing battery in electronic key Push off cover with emblem on side To eliminate the fault, change the position
Replace the battery immediately if the towards the outside using the buttons. of the electronic key or remote control or
system is no longer working properly or the Replace battery, for battery type, see change the battery in the remote control.
range of the remote control is reducing. page 345, pay attention to installation If the fault persists, contact a workshop for
The need for a battery change is indicated position. Engage caps. assistance.
via InSP3 in the service display or, in
Remote control synchronisation Emergency operation, see page 37.
vehicles with check control 3, by an
appropriate message in the display. See The remote control synchronises itself
page 120. automatically during every starting
procedure.
To replace the battery, operate lock on
underside of electronic key and remove Fault in Open&Start system or remote
cover by pushing gently forwards, see control.
Fig. 17037 T on page 37. If the central locking cannot be operated or
the engine cannot be started, the cause
may be one of the following:
z Electronic key out of reception range, or
out of range of remote control,
Central locking system Open&Start system with electronic key 3 To lock

For doors, boot lid/tailgate and tank flap. The electronic key must be within the Close doors, luggage compartment and
outside reception range of the vehicle. tank flap.
To unlock Unlock the vehicle by pulling a door handle
Remote control with mechanical key Remote control with mechanical key
or the knob below the tailgate handle. Press button p on remote control.
Press button q on remote control. or
To open the door, pull the handle. Open Press button q of the electronic keys
the luggage compartment by pulling the remote control.
knob under the tailgate handle. If the door or the luggage compartment is
If the door or the luggage compartment is open, Q illuminates in the instrument
open, Q illuminates in the instrument panel.
panel.
Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people
in the vehicle! The doors cannot be
unlocked from inside.
Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Remote control with mechanical key
The electronic key must be within the All doors must be closed. At the latest
outside reception range of the vehicle. 15 seconds after locking, press button p
There must be no electronic keys inside the on the remote control again.
vehicle. Touching the sensor in the door Lock buttons on all doors are positioned
handle of the drivers or front passengers such that doors cannot be opened.
door locks all doors and the luggage
compartment. If the ignition was on, the drivers door
or must be opened and closed once so that
Press button p of the electronic keys the vehicle can be secured.
remote control again.
Note
z The central locking system will not lock if
the drivers door is not properly closed.
Q illuminates in the instrument panel
as an indication.
z If the front passenger door, the rear
doors 3 or the luggage compartment is
not correctly closed, the LED in the
central locking button m flashes for
10 seconds when the central locking system
is operated, and Q illuminates in the
instrument panel at the same time.
z To lock the doors from within (e.g. to
prevent unwanted entry from outside),
Open&Start system with electronic key 3 Central locking button for locking and press central locking switch m in the
All doors must be closed. The electronic key unlocking the doors from inside the centre console.
must be within the outside reception range vehicle
of the vehicle. Touch the sensor in the door Press button m in the centre console: doors z When the vehicle is unlocked with the key
handle of the drivers or front passengers are locked or unlocked. in the drivers door lock, the other doors
door again within 15 seconds after locking. do not unlock until the drivers door is
The LED in the central locking button m opened.
or illuminates for around 2 minutes after
Press button p of the electronic keys locking with the remote control. z Doors that have been locked using the
remote control again. central locking system can also be
If the doors are locked from the inside opened by pulling the handle on the
All doors are secured against opening. during the journey using the central locking inside of the doors. The central locking is
If the ignition was on, the drivers door button, the LED m illuminates also unlocked at the same time (not
must be opened and closed once so that continuously. possible with Astra TwinTop if roof is
the vehicle can be secured. If the key is in the ignition, locking is only open).
possible if all doors are closed. z Locked doors unlock automatically in
When the mechanical anti-theft locking the event of an accident of a certain
system 3 is active see previous page the severity (to allow external help to gain
doors cannot be unlocked with this button. access). The hazard warning lights and
courtesy light also come on. For this to
occur, the key must be in the ignition
switch.
z With the Open&Start system 3 the For Astra TwinTop with open roof - after
vehicle cannot be unlocked until opening the drivers door, press the central
2 seconds after locking. Within this time, locking button m in the centre console. The
a door handle can be pulled or the vehicle will then be unlocked, provided the
button beneath the tailgate handle anti-theft locking system 3 is not engaged.
operated to check whether the vehicle is Switch on the ignition to deactivate the
locked. Vauxhall alarm system 3. Emergency
z The Open&Start system 3 does not lock operation of the Open&Start system 3,
the vehicle automatically if the electronic see page 37.
key is outside the reception range of the To lock
vehicle (more than 1 metre away from Open passenger door, close drivers door,
the vehicle). press central locking button m in centre
z When using the Open&Start system 3, console. Central locking system locks all
there must not be an electronic key doors. Close passenger door.
inside the vehicle when locking. Fault when locking or unlocking Malfunction in central locking system
z The locking sensors in the door handles Fault in remote control or Open&Start To unlock
must be kept clean to ensure system. 3 Turn key or emergency key with
unrestricted functionality of the To unlock Open&Start system 3, see page 37,
Open&Start system 3. Turn key or emergency key for Open&Start forwards in drivers door lock as far as it will
system 3 (see page 37) forwards in the go. Turn key back to a vertical position and
drivers door lock as far as it will go. Return remove. The other doors can be opened by
key to a vertical position and remove. The pulling the handle on the inside of the
entire vehicle is unlocked when the drivers doors (not possible if anti-theft locking
door is opened. system 3 enabled beforehand). The
luggage compartment and the fuel filler
cap remain locked. To deactivate the
anti-theft locking system 3 switch ignition
on, see page 46.
Luggage compartment
To unlock
Remote control with mechanical key
Press button q on the remote control. The
luggage compartment is unlocked
together with the doors.
Open&Start system with electronic key 3
Pulling the button below the handle
unlocks and opens the luggage
compartment and doors when the
electronic key is detected within the outer
reception range.
or
Press button q on the remote control of
To lock the electronic key, this unlocks the luggage To open:
Insert the key or emergency key for compartment and the doors. The luggage compartment is opened by
Open&Start system 3 (see page 37) into operating the button beneath the handle.
the opening above the lock on the inside of
the door and press until the lock audibly 9 Warning
engages. Then close the door. The
procedure must be repeated for each door. Do not drive with the tailgate open or
The drivers door can also be locked from ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky
outside using the lock. The unlocked fuel objects, since toxic exhaust gas could
filler flap and tailgate/boot lid cannot be penetrate the interior.
locked.
Fitting of accessories on the tailgate will
Emergency operation of Open&Start
increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy,
system 3,
the tailgate will then not stay open.
see page 37.
To close: To lock
Close luggage compartment using the Close doors, luggage compartment and
handle on the inside of the tailgate. tank flap.
Do not operate the button beneath the Remote control with mechanical key
handle when closing. Otherwise the Press button p on remote control.
luggage compartment will once again be Open&Start system with electronic key 3
unlocked. Press button p of the electronic key remote
control or touch sensor in handle of one of
the front doors. The electronic key must be
recognised in the external reception area.
It is advisable for the driver to keep the
electronic key on his person.
Vauxhall alarm system 3

monitors
z the doors, luggage compartment,
bonnet,
z the passenger compartment,
z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised,
z the ignition.
9 Warning
Do not use the system if there are people
in the vehicle! The doors cannot be
unlocked from the inside. To activate Open&Start system with electronic key 3
Remote control with mechanical key All doors, windows and bonnet must be
All doors, windows, the sun roof 3 and the closed. The electronic key must be in the
bonnet must be closed. Within 15 seconds outer reception range of the vehicle. No
of locking, press button p on the remote more than 15 seconds after locking, touch
control again. the sensor in the handle of the drivers or
If the ignition was switched on, the drivers front passenger door again.
door must be opened and closed once so or
that the Vauxhall alarm system can be Press button p of the electronic keys
switched on. remote control again.
If the ignition was switched on, the drivers
door must be opened and closed once so
that the Vauxhall alarm system can be
switched on.
4. Switch on Vauxhall alarm system. LED

illuminates. After approx. 10 seconds the
system is activated, without monitoring
of the passenger compartment or vehicle
tilt. LED flashes until system is
switched off.
For Astra TwinTop, passenger
compartment monitoring is deactivated if
the roof is open to prevent false alarms.
Activation without monitoring of Light emitting diode (LED)

passenger compartment and vehicle tilt During the first 10 seconds of Vauxhall
To activate e.g. if animals are left in the alarm system activation:
vehicle. z LED on = Test, activation delay
1. Close tailgate and bonnet. z LED flashes = Door, luggage
2. Press button b in the roof console. quickly compartment or
The LED in button m flashes (max. bonnet open, or
10 seconds), see Fig. 17051 T. system fault
3. Close doors. After the first 10 seconds of Vauxhall alarm
system activation:
z LED flashes = System activated
slowly
z LED on after = Deactivation function
approx.
1 second
If a system fault occurs, contact a
workshop.
In the event of a fault in the remote control

or the Open&Start system, open the vehicle
as described on page 43.
If the alarm is triggered when the drivers
door is opened, deactivate the Vauxhall
alarm system by switching on the ignition.
Note
Changes to the vehicle interior, such as the
use of seat covers, could impair the
function of passenger compartment
monitoring.
Alarm
While the Vauxhall alarm system is
To deactivate Open&Start system with electronic key 3 switched on the alarm can be triggered:
Remote control with mechanical key Pulling a handle or the button below the z an acoustic signal (horn) and
Press button q on remote control tailgate handle unlocks the vehicle and z a visual signal (hazard warning lights).
or disables the Vauxhall alarm system when The number and duration of the alarms are
Switch on ignition. the electronic key is detected within the legally established.
outer reception range.
The alarm can be silenced by pressing a
or
button of the remote control or by
Press button q of the electronic keys
switching on the ignition. The Vauxhall
remote control.
alarm system is deactivated at the same
time.
Child safety locks 3 Exterior mirrors Adjust exterior mirrors electrically 3

Manual adjustment with levers in the front Adjust with the four-way switch in drivers
9 Warning doors or electric 3 switch in drivers door door: press mirror switch to left or right:
console. four-way switch works on corresponding
Use the child safety lock whenever mirror.
children are occupying the rear seats. Adjust exterior mirrors manually
Swivel lever in mirror base on front doors. The mirror glass swivels in the same
Disregard may lead to injuries or
direction as the activation of the four-way
endanger life. Vehicle passengers should The mirror glass swivels in the same switch.
be informed accordingly. direction as the activation of the lever.
Aspherical exterior mirror 3
Using key or screwdriver, turn knob on rear The aspherical mirror glass reduces the
door lock from the vertical position: door blind spot. The curvature makes objects
cannot be opened from inside. appear smaller, so it is more difficult to
estimate the distance from following
vehicles.
If an electrical retracted mirror is extended

manually, pressing button n will cause the
mirror to move all the way forward. The
other mirror will be eclectically swiveled to
the driving position. If button n is pressed
again, both mirrors will be electrically
retracted. Press again: both mirrors swivel
to the driving position.
Fold mirrors back into driving position
before moving away.
Swing in exterior mirror: For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior

Manual: The exterior mirrors can be swung mirrors will swing out of their normal
in by pressing on the outside of the mounting position if they are bumped with
housing. sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by
Electrically 3: Press n and both mirrors will applying slight pressure to the mirror
swing in. housing.
Press button n again - both exterior

mirrors swivel to the driving position.
Electric windows 3
9 Warning
Take care when operating the electric
windows 3 and the sun roof 3. Risk of
injury, particularly to children. Vehicle
passengers should be informed
accordingly.
If there are children on the rear seat,
switch on the child safety system 3 for
the electric windows.
Keep a close watch on the windows and
sun roof when closing them. Ensure that
Interior mirror Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror 3 nothing becomes trapped in them as
To adjust, swivel mirror housing. Dazzling is automatically reduced at night. they move.
To reduce dazzling at night, swivel lever on With the ignition off, the mirror does
not dim. The electric windows can be used
underside of mirror housing.
z with ignition on,
z within 5 minutes of switching ignition
off 3,
z within 5 minutes of switching ignition key
to position 1.
Stand-by after switching on the ignition
ends when the drivers door is opened.
Operated via two or four 3 switches in the Safety function Child safety system for rear windows 3
drivers door handle. The front switches are If the window glass encounters resistance Switch z between the rear switches in the
for the driver and front passenger doors. above the middle of the window during drivers door handle
The rear switches 3 are for the rear doors. automatic closing, it is immediately z Forward (red field visible): Rear door
Additional switches are located in the front stopped and the window opened again. switches non-operational
passenger door and rear doors 3. In the event of difficulty due to frost or the z Rearward (green field visible): Rear door
For incremental operation, briefly pull or like, press the appropriate window switch switches operational
press the switch. For automatic opening or several times until the window is closed.
closing, pull or press the switch longer. Pull
or press the switch again to stop the
movement.
Central switch for electric windows, Panoramic windscreen 3 Close the roof lining
Astra TwinTop Open the roof lining Move the roof lining forward to a suitable
Button $ or " in the roof console. Turn the handle to the right and move the position. When moved all the way forward,
Press button $: all windows are closed. roof lining rearward to a suitable position. the roof lining engages in position.
Press button ": all windows are opened. Note

Close the sun visors before sliding the roof
lining.
To raise:
When the roof is closed, press button .
The roof is tilted in the rear.
To open:
Press button again from the tilted
position. The roof opens to its stop.
To close:
Press button d.
For reasons of safety, the roof closes from
its open position to approx. 20 cm. Hold
button d depressed to close completely.
Sunroof 3 Sunblind
Operated via rocker switches in the roof Used to reduce sun penetration into the
console when the ignition is switched on. interior when the sunroof is closed.
For incremental operation, briefly press the The sunblind opens when the sun roof
button. For automatic opening or closing, opens.
press the button longer. To open:
Press button G. The sunblind opens to its
stop.
To close:
Press button H.
For reasons of safety, the roller blind closes
from its open position to approx. 20 cm.
Hold button H depressed to close
completely.
Note Overload Fault

z If the top of the roof is wet, raise roof, If the system is overloaded, the power If the sun roof and sunblind do not operate
allow water to run off and then open supply is automatically cut off for a short properly, activate electronics as follows:
roof. time. 1. Switch on ignition.
z When using a roof rack, check the The system is protected by fuses in the fuse 2. Close the sun roof and hold button d
clearance of the sun roof to avoid box, see page 262. depressed at least 10 seconds.
damage.
3. Close sunblind and hold button H
depressed at least 10 seconds.
TwinTop
With TwinTop, a convertible hardtop, Astra
unites the benefits of a coupe with those of
a convertible.
9 Warning
Take care when operating the
convertible hardtop. Risk of injury.
Monitor the action zone above, to the
side and to the rear of the vehicle during
roof operation. Make sure that nothing
could become pinched.
Make sure no one is in the action zone of
Operating the convertible hardtop To open the roof
the roof or boot lid during roof operation.
Stand-by with ignition key in lock from There must be no objects in front of the
Risk of injury.
position 1, or for Open&Start-System 3 rear window or in the pivot area of the roof
Check the amount height, length and switch on ignition. and boot lid.
width of available space before
Requirements: Hold button > in the roof console
operating the roof, e. g. in a garage,
z Vehicle is stationary or driving no more depressed until the roof is completely open
parking garage or when a bicycle rack is
than 20 mph (30 km/h). and the boot lid is closed.
fitted.
z Luggage compartment blind is closed An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the
Vehicle passengers should be informed
and engaged - see Fig. 18024 T above opening procedure.
accordingly.
and page 82. Open the door windows slightly before
Before leaving the vehicle, remove the
z Boot lid is closed. opening the roof. If button > is pressed
ignition key in order to prevent
again after the acoustic signal sounds, the
unauthorised operation of the windows If any of the requirements are not fulfilled, door windows will close.
and sunroof. a warning buzzer sounds when the switch is
actuated and the roof does not open or
close.
With the vehicle stopped, the roof can be To close the roof With the vehicle stopped, the roof can be
opened using the remote control 3. Unlock There must be no objects in the pivot area closed using the remote control 3. Lock the
the vehicle. Press button q again and keep of the roof and boot lid. vehicle. Press button p again and keep
pressed until the roof has opened fully and Hold button < in the roof console pressed until the roof and boot lid have
the boot lid has closed. depressed until the roof and boot lid are closed completely.
During operation with the remote control, completely closed.
6
the door windows are opened completely. An acoustic signal sounds at the end of the
closing procedure.
Open the door windows slightly before
closing the roof. If button < is pressed
again after the acoustic signal sounds, the
door windows will close.
Indicator and warning buzzers z Continuous warning buzzer during roof Note
z Indicator buzzer upon completed operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have z Do not open the luggage compartment
opening or closing of the convertible been triggered. until the acoustic signal indicating the
hardtop. z Continuous warning buzzer starting one end of the roof opening or closing
z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising minute before the end of the 9-minute procedure has sounded.
or lowering of the electric luggage stand-by time with the roof in an z The luggage compartment blind must
compartment loading aid. intermediate position. always be closed during roof operation.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed z Continuous warning buzzer starting one z There must be no one at the covers
during roof operation. minute before the end of the 9-minute behind the rear head restraints.
z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully stand-by time with the loading aid in a z There must be no objects in the pivot
opening during operation of the luggage raised position. area or the roof or on the covers behind
compartment loading aid. z Continuous warning buzzer when closing the rear head restraints.
z Gong tone during roof operation if the boot lid if the lowering process of the z The roof can only be operated at
vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h). electric load aid is not complete or was temperatures above 20 C. If the
interrupted. temperature is below this limit, a gong
z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds
20 mph (30 km/h)if the roof is not fully will sound three times when roof
open or closed. operation is requested.
z Three gong tones during roof or loading z Frequent operation of the roof with the
aid operation if the luggage engine off discharges the battery.
compartment blind is not attached. z Repeated operation of the roof without
z Three gong tones during roof operation breaks can cause overloading and
if outside temperature is below 20 C, therefore malfunctions.
vehicle battery voltage is too low or the
system is overloaded.
z The roof can be held in an intermediate Fault Rollover protection system

position for 9 minutes to facilitate The automatic drive of the roof is only To optimise safety in the event of a
cleaning of roof spaces. This is done by operational if the roof is in the proper open rollover, the Astra TwinTop is equipped
disengaging the actuation switch. One or closed position. with reinforced windscreen frame and
minute before the end of this period, a Check if: anti-roll bars behind the rear sat head
continuous buzzer sounds as a warning restraints. The anti-roll bars are fixed or
that the hold period is almost over and z The luggage compartment blind is deployable depending on vehicle variant.
the roof could start to move. engaged in the closed position
z Activating the roof on uneven ground z The boot lid is completely closed
can lead to malfunctions and damage. z Outside temperature is above 20 C
z There is sufficient battery voltage
z There is a system overload
If the automatic drive is not operational,
two persons are required to manually close
the roof. See the accompanying
instructions for Astra TwinTop. We
recommend that you seek professional
assistance.
Fixed anti-roll bars Deployable anti-roll bars 3 Luggage compartment

are secured to the vehicle bodywork. are located between the rear head The roof can only be opened if the load in
restraints and the boot lid in such a way the luggage compartment does not
that they are out of sight. In the event of a exceed the height of the luggage
rollover, head-on collision or side impact, compartment blind or protrude sideways.
the anti-roll bars deploy upwards within The load height marked in the figure must
milliseconds. The convertible roof must not not be exceeded. The luggage
be operated if the anti-roll bars have been compartment blind must be flat; objects
deployed. A continuous warning will sound below it must not press it upwards.
if the switch is actuated. The airbag control Otherwise the roof and load may be
indicator v illuminates if the anti-roll bars damaged.
have been deployed. Electrically operated loading aid for the
Manual retraction of the anti-roll bars luggage compartment see page 82.
see page 104. Luggage compartment blind
Further information, see page 106. see page 82.
Blockage of boot lid on closure 3 Wind deflector 3

To avoid damage to the open roof, boot lid With the wind deflector installed
or load, the boot lid can only be closed if turbulence, draughts and noise in the
the electric load aid is in the lower end passenger compartment are reduced when
position, see page 82. the roof is open.
The rear seats cannot be occupied when
the wind deflector is in place.
Do not place any objects on the wind
deflector.
Unblocking on failure of electric drive

Push locking lever forward as shown in the
figure.
With tyre repair set 3, the wind deflector is Fitting Join together the unfolded ends of the wind
folded down into a storage compartment 3 Take the wind deflector from the luggage deflector: press in the pin at the slider,
in the luggage compartment below the compartment. guide the hinge over the pin and release
loading floor cover. Expand the collapsed wind deflector as the slider so that the pin engages in the
For the version with spare wheel 3, the illustrated. hinge.
wind deflector is folded away in the
luggage compartment
Insert the guide clips of the wind deflector Pull the toggle of the right and left locking The wind deflector can be folded back
in the seat belt recesses between the rear pin and turn to lock. Straighten out the when not in use.
head restraints. wind deflector, turn the toggle back and If the wind deflector is folded and the rear
engage the locking pin in the recess in the seats are unoccupied, the wind deflector
side trim. can remain mounted in the vehicle when
the roof is closed.
Removing
Remove in reverse order, wind deflector is
completely folded down in the luggage
compartment:
For tyre repair kit 3 in the compartment
below the loading floor cover.
For version with spare wheel 3, place in
the luggage compartment.
The wind deflector must never protrude
upwards or sideways from the luggage
compartment, see marked loading height,
see Fig. 17973 T on page 60.
64 Seats, interior
Seats, interior Operating the seat belts..................... 88

Child restraint system 3...................... 90
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system ....... 92
Rollover protection system 3 ............. 104
Cigarette lighter 3............................... 107
Accessory socket 3 ............................. 107
Front seats ........................................... 64
Ashtray 3 ............................................. 108
Head restraints .................................... 68
Foldaway tables 3 .............................. 110
Armrest 3 at drivers seat ................... 70
Stowage compartments ..................... 110
Armrest 3 in back seat backrest........ 70
Sun visors ............................................. 111
Extending the luggage compartment,
Hatch ................................................. 71
Extending the luggage compartment,
Estate ................................................. 72
Extending the luggage compartment, Front seats
Astra TwinTop ................................... 75
Folding down the front passenger
9 Warning
seat 3................................................. 75 Never adjust seats while driving as they
Luggage compartment cover ............ 76 could move uncontrollably.
Safety net 3, Estate............................. 78
Luggage compartment grille 3, Adjust seat longitudinally
pick-up ............................................... 79 To adjust, pull the handle on the front seat,
Lashing eyes 3 .................................... 80 slide the seat and release the handle.
Rails and hooks in the luggage
compartment 3, Estate .................... 80 9 Warning
FlexOrganizer 3................................... 80
Important: Do not sit nearer than 10
Cargo box 3......................................... 81
inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to
Luggage compartment blind, permit safe airbag deployment.
Astra TwinTop ................................... 82
Easy Load............................................. 82
Notes on loading the vehicle.............. 84
Three-stage safety system.................. 85
Three-point seat belts ......................... 85
Belt tensioners...................................... 86
Seats, interior 65
Adjusting the backrest Adjusting the seat height 3 Adjusting the seat angle 3
To adjust, turn side handwheel on the seat To adjust, operate lever on the outside of To adjust, pull the lever on the front of the
while releasing the load on the backrest. the seat. seat, adjust the angle and release the
Move backrest to suit seating position. Pump action on lever lever.
Up: Seat higher The seat should engage perceptibly.
Down: Seat lower Adjust the inclination by distributing body
weight.
66 Seats, interior
The seat back can only be tipped forwards

from an upright position.
When the backrest is folded forward, do
not activate the handwheel for backrest
adjustment.
In vehicles with a panoramic window 3:
to tilt seats forward, push head restraints
down and lift up sun visors.
Adjusting the lumbar support 3 Fold the seat backrest forwards 3

To adjust, turn side handwheel on backrest To fold forwards, raise the release lever
while relieving the load on the backrest. and fold the backrest forwards. Lower the
Adjust lumbar support to suit personal release lever and the backrest engages in
requirements. the forward-folded position 3. Slide seat
forwards 3.
To straighten the seat, slide back and it
engages in its original position 3. Raise
release lever 3, straighten seat back, lower
release lever, seat back engages.
For seat without memory function 3:
engage seat in desired position.
Seats, interior 67
The seat backrests must not be tilted too

far back (recommended maximum tilting
angle approx. 25).
9 Warning
Failure to observe the descriptions could
lead to injuries which could be fatal.
accordingly before starting off.
Adjusting the thigh support 3 on the Seat position

sports seats 3 Adjust drivers seat such that with the
To adjust, press the button on the front of driver sitting upright the steering wheel is
the adjustment padding and slide the thigh held in the area of its upper spokes with the
support. drivers arms slightly bent.
Adjust thigh support to suit personal Push passenger seat as far back as
requirements. possible.
68 Seats, interior
Head restraints Adjusting the rear, centre head Adjusting the rear head restraints 3,
Adjusting the front head restraints and restraint 3 Astra TwinTop
rear outboard head restraints 3 To adjust, pull the head restraint up or To adjust, pull the head restraint up or
To adjust, press button on side and adjust press the catch to release. Then push the press the two catches to release. Then push
height. head restraint down. the head restraint down.
To fold down the backrests (see page 71) To fold down the backrest (see page 71) or To improve visibility when the rear seats
or improve visibility when the rear seats are improve visibility when the centre rear seat are not occupied, push the head restraints
not occupied, remove the head restraints is not occupied, remove the head restraint all the way down.
or push them all the way down. or push it all the way down. If the seats are occupied, set height
If the seats are occupied, set height If the seat is occupied, set height according according to body size.
according to body size. to body size. Do not place any objects on the cover
behind the head restraints or between the
head restraints and the anti-roll bars 3.
Seats, interior 69
Head restraint position Active head restraints 3 Removing the head restraints
The middle of the head restraint should be In the event of a rear-end impact, the Press and release the two catches. Pull and
at eye level. If this is not possible for active head restraints tilt forwards slightly. remove the head restraint.
extremely tall persons, set to highest The head is more effectively supported by To fold down the backrests 3 (see page 71),
position, and set to lowest position for the head restraint and the danger of push the rear head restraints all the way
small persons. whiplash in the neck area is reduced. down or remove.
Active head restraints are identified by the
9 Warning lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint
Note
Only approved objects or components
guide sleeves. should be attached to the head restraint of
Failure to observe the descriptions can
lead to injuries which could be fatal. the unoccupied front passenger seat.
accordingly before moving away.
70 Seats, interior
Armrest 3 at drivers seat Armrest 3 in back seat backrest Astra TwinTop

Push raised armrest backward against Fold down the armrest, pulling the strap Pull the armrest by the strap, pivot it down
resistance and fold down. obliquely down (45). and position on the sit with the flat side up.
The armrest can be moved to different When the centre rear seat is in use or The armrest is held in place on the backrest
positions in stages by lifting it. the rear backrests are folded, fold the with a retaining strap. To fully remove the
armrest up. armrest, disengage the bracket at the
If the armrest is not required it can be retaining strap.
raised. A flap located behind the armrest
facilitates transport of long, narrow A flap located behind the armrest
Stowage compartment in armrest facilitates transport of long, narrow
see page 110. objects see page 71.
objects see page 75.
Seats, interior 71
Extending the luggage Fold down centre backrest 3 Restoring backrest to an upright position
compartment, Hatch Push head restraint all the way down Guide the seat belt through the side
Folding the rear seat backrests see page 68. bracket to protect against damage.
Pushing rear head restraints all the way Disengage backrest using lever and fold Catches must audibly engage when rear
down or removing, see pages 68, 69. onto seat cushion. seat backrests are raised.
Slide front seat forward slightly. Folding down the centre seat backrest The three-point seat belt for the centre rear
Disengage the backrest (single or split 3) makes it possible to load longer objects. seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel
using the pushbutton and fold it down onto The outer seats can still be used for if the backrest is properly engaged.
the seat cushion. occupants. Notes on loading
See page 84.
Return front seat to desired position. 9 Warning
The load must not obstruct the operation
of the pedals, handbrake or transmission
or restrict the drivers freedom of
movement. Do not place loose objects in
the interior. Pay attention to notes on
page 84.
72 Seats, interior
Extending the luggage Raise the seat cushion and fold the Remove rear outer head restraints. Push
compartment, Estate backrest centre head restraint all the way down
Folding the rear seat backrests onto the Pull the strap on the seat cushion and raise see pages 68, 69.
seat cushion the backrest towards the front (split 3 or Stow the removed head restraints in the
Push the rear head restraints all the way one-piece). cavity below the raised seat cushions.
down or remove, see pages 68, 69. To Detach the hooks of the luggage
detach hooks of luggage compartment compartment cover from the head
cover from head restraints, see page 77. restraints see page 77.
Slide front seat forward slightly.
Disengage the backrest (single or split 3)
using the pushbutton and fold it down onto
the seat cushion.
Return front seat to desired position.
Seats, interior 73
Folding the centre seat backrest makes it

possible to load longer objects. The outer
seats can still be used for occupants.
9 Warning
page 84.
Disengage backrest (one-piece or split 3) Fold down centre backrest 3

using pushbuttons, fold forward and Push head restraint all the way down
engage. see page 68.
Disengage backrest using lever and fold
onto seat cushion. If the seat cushion is
raised, fold it forward until it engages.
74 Seats, interior
The three-point seat belt for the centre rear

seat can only be pulled from its inertia reel
if the backrest is properly engaged.
Safety net 3
See page 78.
Notes on loading
See page 84.
Restoring the backrests or seat cushions 3 Raised seat cushions: Insert and adjust
to their original position head restraints in backrests see pages 68,
Guide the seat belt through the side 69. Fold back seat cushions, making sure
bracket to protect against damage. the belt buckles are properly positioned.
To restore the backrest to an upright Attach the hooks of the luggage
position, fold up, pressing the button on compartment cover to the head restraints
the backrest. Audibly engage the backrest see page 77.
in an upright position.
Seats, interior 75
Extending the luggage Cover behind armrest can be locked from Folding down the front passenger
compartment, Astra TwinTop luggage compartment 3: turn button 90: seat 3
Loading area between rear seats Locked = Horizontal button To push down and remove front passenger
Pull out the armrest by the strap. Unlocked = Vertical button seat head restraint, see pages 68, 69.
The armrest is held in place on the backrest Push front passenger seat back.
with a retaining strap. To fully remove the Notes on loading
See page 84. Fold front passenger seat forward by
armrest, disengage the bracket at the raising release lever.
retaining strap.
To raise the backrest, push release lever
Pull the handle and fold down the cover. forwards, raise front passenger seat
backrest and audibly engage.
9 Warning
page 84.
76 Seats, interior
To close
Press handle on luggage compartment
cover rearwards; the cover automatically
engages in its end position.
Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged
objects on the cover.
Luggage compartment cover Estate

Hatch To open
Removing Press handle on luggage compartment
Unhook retaining straps from tailgate. cover down. The cover automatically
unrolls.
Pull cover from the side guides.
Fitting
Engage cover in side guides and fold
downwards. Attach retaining straps to
tailgate.
Seats, interior 77
Fitting
Insert luggage compartment cover into
recess on left, raise release lever on right
side, insert cover into recess on right,
engage and push lever down.
Attach the hooks on the head restraints -
see Fig. 17079 T.
To cover the gap between the luggage Removing

compartment cover and the rear Open the luggage compartment cover and
backrests, there is a cover on the cartridge. detach the hooks from the head restraints.
Attach the two hooks of the cover to the Raise release lever at right side of luggage
head restraint guide rods. If the safety net compartment cover. Lift right side of cover
is mounted, run the hooks through the net first, then pull left side out of recess.
mesh.
78 Seats, interior
Safety net 3, Estate Adjust strap length on safety net by Fitting behind front seats
The safety net can be mounted behind the attaching the upper hook to the eye of the Raise the rear seat cushions, see page 72.
rear seats or, if the rear seat backrests are strap, see Fig. 17085 T on page 79, and Unroll the safety net.
folded and the seat cushions raised, attach to eyes in the right and left of the
floor. There are two brackets in the roof frame
behind the front seats.
above the front seats. Hook the net rods
Passengers must not be carried behind the into the brackets on one side and then the
safety net. other. Slide forward to engage.
Fitting behind the rear seats Adjust strap length on safety net by
Remove luggage compartment cover, see attaching the upper hook to the eye of the
page 76 strap, see Fig. 17085 T on page 79, and
Unroll the safety net. attach to eyes in the right and left of the
floor.
There are two brackets in the roof frame.
Hook the net rods into the brackets on one Remove rear outer head restraints and fold
side and then the other. Slide forward to backrests forward, see pages 68, 69, 72.
engage.
Seats, interior 79
Removing Luggage compartment grille 3, Lock grille in open position.

Detach the safety net belt straps by tipping pick-up
up the length adjuster. To transport long objects, part of the
9 Warning
Unhook the safety net rods from the luggage compartment grille behind the
brackets in the roof frame. Roll up the net passenger seat can be opened:
and secure with a strap. Release passenger seat back and fold or restrict the drivers freedom of
forward. movement. Do not place loose objects in
Press bracket down and fold grille the interior. Pay attention to notes on
section up. page 84.
To close the grille section from the open

position, push bracket down, fold down
grille and engage, see Fig. 18441 T.
Check that the closed grille is properly
locked.
80 Seats, interior
Lashing eyes 3 Rails and hooks in the luggage FlexOrganizer 3

in the luggage compartment are used to compartment 3, Estate Flexible system for dividing the luggage
secure lashing straps 3 or a luggage net 3 The side walls of the luggage compartment compartment or securing loads in an
to prevent objects that are being house two rails. Insert the hooks in the Estate.
transported from sliding. desired position in the rails: insert the hook The system consists of
in the upper groove on the rail and press in z Adapters
the lower groove. z Variable partition net
Pull off the hook to remove. z Mesh pockets for the side walls
z Hooks in the luggage compartment
Components are mounted in the two guide
rails in the side walls of the luggage
compartment by means of adapters or
hooks.
Seats, interior 81
Variable partition net Hooks and mesh pockets for side walls Cargo box 3
Insert an adapter in each rail: Fold up Insert hooks in rails in desired position: Foldable box under the floor cover used to
handle plate, insert adapter in upper and insert hook in upper groove in rail and push divide the luggage compartment.
lower groove of rails, move to desired into lower groove. The mesh pocket can be
position. To lock the adapter, swivel the suspended from the hooks. The cargo box may only be loaded when
handle plate up. Compress the rods of the the backrests are engaged in an upright
Removing position.
partition net slightly and insert in Press the partition net rods together and
corresponding openings of the adapter. remove from the adapters. To remove the cargo box floor cover,
The longer rod must be inserted in the remove first the right half then the left half.
upper adapter. Adapter: fold open the retainer, release the For models with towing equipment, first
adapter from the lower groove and remove release the coupling ball bar fixing strap
from the upper groove. and thread this through the eye see
Release the hooks from the rails. page 237. Installation in the reverse order.
82 Seats, interior
Luggage compartment blind, Easy Load z Briefly press button ,: The folded roof is
Astra TwinTop raised. The roof remains in this end
(Electronically operated loading position for approx. 9 minutes.
To open: aid for the luggage compartment
Release luggage compartment blind from of the Astra TwinTop)
recesses on left and right, blind rolls up The loading aid makes it possible to
automatically. comfortably load the luggage
To close: compartment when the roof is open. The
Grasp the handle, pull the blind towards press of a button will raise the roof folded
the rear of the vehicle and engage in the up in the luggage compartment 25 cm.
recess on the right and left. This enlarges the load opening of the
Do not place any objects on the luggage luggage compartment.
compartment blind. z Open the boot lid.
There must be no objects outside of or on z Unhook luggage compartment blind
top of the luggage compartment blind and attach to rear window frame with
when the roof is open or in the process of holder, see Fig. 17978 T>
opening.
The roof can only be operated with the
luggage compartment blind engaged in
the recess.
Seats, interior 83
z Only close the boot lid once the

9 Warning confirmation signal has sounded to
indicate that the loading aid is in its
Take care when operating the loading lower end position.
aid. Risk of injury.
z If the loading aid is not in its lower end
Make sure that nothing could be pinched. position when the boot lid is closed, a
Make sure no one is in the action zone warning tone sounds or the boot lid is
during operation. Risk of injury. blocked mechanically 3, see page 61.
This is especially important for children. z Do not touch moving parts.
Inform passengers accordingly. z One minute before the end of the hold
time for the raised loading aid, a
Note warning buzzer will sound to remind you
z Do not place objects on or near the to lower the roof.
z Load luggage compartment at most to luggage compartment blind.
z The loading aid is only operable when
marked load height, otherwise the roof z The folded roof can only be lowered the vehicle is unlocked.
and load could be damaged. when the blind is closed. Otherwise, a
z Frequent operation of the loading aid
z Suspend the luggage compartment warning buzzer will sound three times.
with the engine off runs the battery
blind from the rear window frame, and z The movement of the tilted roof can be down.
engage in recesses on right and left. The stopped by pressing button , and
z Repeated operation of the loading aid
luggage compartment blind must be another longer press reverses the
without breaks can cause overloading
flat; objects underneath it must not push direction of the movement.
and therefore malfunctions.
it upwards.
z A confirmation buzzer is heard in the
z Briefly press button ,: The folded roof is upper and lower roof end positions when
lowered. the roof is tilted.
z Close the boot lid only after the
confirmation signal has sounded.
Otherwise the roof could be damaged.
84 Seats, interior
z Estate: mount the safety net 3 when z Astra TwinTop: Do not place any objects
transporting objects in the luggage on the cover of the deployable anti-roll
compartment see page 78. bars 3, behind the rear head restraints
z Estate: close luggage compartment or in the luggage compartment outside
cover see page 76. of, on or next to the luggage
compartment cover.
z If the backrests are not folded down
when transporting objects in the z Do not place objects in the expansion
luggage compartment, they must be range of airbags or extending anti-roll
engaged in their upright position 3 see bars 3, since this poses a risk of injury if
pages 71, 74. the systems are actuated.
z Do not allow the load to protrude above z Do not drive with luggage compartment
the upper edge of the rear seat open when transporting bulky objects,
backrests, or above the upper edge of for example, since toxic exhaust fumes
the front seat backrests if the rear seat could penetrate the interior.
Notes on loading the vehicle backrests 3 are folded down. z Weights, payload and roof load
z Heavy objects in the luggage see page 325.
compartment should be placed against z Astra TwinTop: pay attention to
the engaged rear seat backrests 3 or, if maximum loading height with roof open, z Driving with a roof load see pages 198,
the rear seat backrests are folded down, see Fig. 17973 T on page 82. Do not 200, 232 increases the sensitivity of the
against the front seat backrests. If place objects on top of or next to the vehicle to crosswinds and has a
objects are to be stacked, the heavier luggage compartment blind. detrimental effect on vehicle handling
objects should be placed at the bottom. z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit owing to the vehicles higher centre of
Unsecured objects in the luggage (cushion) 3 must always be freely gravity.
compartment would be thrown forward accessible.
with great force in the event of heavy 9 Warning
braking, for example. z Do not place any objects in front of the
rear window or on the instrument panel. Failure to observe these descriptions can
z Secure objects with lashing straps 3 They are reflected in the glass, obstruct lead to injuries which may be fatal.
attached to lashing eyes, see page 80. If the drivers view and will be thrown Vehicle passengers should be informed
heavy loads slip when the vehicle is through the vehicle, for instance in the accordingly.
braked heavily or driven around a bend, event of heavy braking.
the handling of the vehicle may change.
z The load must not obstruct the operation
of the pedals, the handbrake or the
gears or restrict the drivers freedom of
the interior.
Seats, interior 85
Three-stage safety system

Comprising:
9 Warning
z Three-point seat belts The airbag systems and anti-roll bars 3
z Belt tensioners at the front seats serve to supplement the three-point seat
belts and belt tensioners. The seat belts
z Airbag systems for driver, front seat must therefore always be worn.
passenger and rear outboard seats 3. Disregard of these instructions could lead
On Astra TwinTop 3, roll-over bar to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle
behind rear seats. passengers should be informed
The three stages are activated in sequence accordingly.
depending on the severity of the accident:
Read the instructions supplied with the
z The automatic seat belt locking devices
child restraint system!
prevent the belt strap from being pulled
out and thus ensure that the vehicle Three-point seat belts
occupants are retained in their seats.
The vehicle is equipped with three-point
z The front seat belts are pulled down at seat belts with automatic retractors and
the belt buckles. This means the belts fit locking devices, allowing freedom of body
snugly, the occupants are decelerated movement although the spring tensioned
early with the vehicle and the body seat belts always ensure a snug fit.
loading is reduced.
For information on correct seating position,
z In the event of a severe accident, the see pages 67, 88, 94.
airbag systems and deployable anti-roll
The seat belts are locked during heavy
bars 3 also deploy, forming safety
acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle.
cushions for the occupants. The front
airbags are inflated in two stages based
on the severity of the collision.
86 Seats, interior
Belt force limiters

9 Warning on the front seat safety belts, reduce the
stress on the body by damping the release
Always wear your seat belt, and that of the seat belt during a collision. The
means also in urban traffic and when you forward movement of the body is therefore
are a rear seat passenger. It can save controlled.
your life!
Checking the seat belts
Pregnant women must always wear a Check all parts of the belt system
seat belt, see page 88. periodically for damage and function.
Replace damaged components. After an
In the event of an accident, persons not accident, have the seat belts and deployed
wearing seat belts endanger their fellow belt tensioners replaced by a workshop.
occupants and themselves.
Do not modify the seat belts, their
Control indicator X 3 for the seat belt anchorages, the automatic retractors or
see page 114. the belt buckles in any way. Belt tensioners
Seat belts are only intended for one person. Make sure that seat belts are not damaged The front seat belts are fitted with belt
They are not suitable for anyone under or trapped by sharp-edged objects. tensioners. The seat belts are pulled down
12 years of age or under 150 cm tall. at the buckles in the event of a front or
rear-impact above a certain severity. This
For children up to 12 years of age, we tightens the seat belts.
recommend the Vauxhall child restraint
system, see page 90. Actuation of belt tensioners
is indicated by illumination of control
indicator v, see following page.
If the belt tensioners are triggered, they
must be replaced by a workshop.
Important information, see page 87.
Seats, interior 87
z The belt tensioner and airbag system

9 Warning control electronics can be found in the
centre console area. In order to avoid
Have the cause of the fault eliminated malfunctions, do not store magnetic
immediately by a workshop. objects in this area.
The systems integrated self-diagnostics z When the rear seats are being used,
allows faults to be quickly remedied. please ensure that the components of
the front seat belts are not damaged by
Important
shoes or other objects. Do not allow dirt
z Affixing or placing accessories and other
to penetrate the automatic retractors of
objects not specifically approved for
the seat belts.
your vehicle type within the action zone
of the belt tensioners (near the belt z We recommend that you have the front
buckles) is not permitted, since this could seats removed by a workshop.
result in injury if the belt tensioners are z The belt tensioners trigger once only,
Control indicator v for belt tensioners actuated.
The function of the belt tensioners is indicated by illumination of control
monitored electronically together with the z Do not make any modifications to the indicator v. Belt tensioners when
airbag systems and the deployable components of the belt tensioners, as triggered must be replaced by a
anti-roll bars 3. Their operational this will render the vehicle unroadworthy. workshop.
readiness is indicated by control indicator z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety
v in the instrument panel. When the 9 Warning instructions given for this must be
ignition is switched on, the control indicator observed. Take the vehicle to a recycling
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds. If it does Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting company for disposal.
not illuminate, does not go out after of seat belts or belt buckles) can actuate
4 seconds or illuminates whilst driving, the belt tensioners, with risk of injury.
there is a fault in the belt tensioner or and
airbag systems or in the deployable
anti-roll bars 3, see page 98. The systems
may fail to trigger in the event of an
accident.
Deployment of the belt tensioners is
indicated by continuous illumination of v.
88 Seats, interior
Operating the seat belts 9 Warning Height adjustment 3

Fitting seat belts Adjusting the height of the upper
Pull seat belt out of retractor and guide deflection point of the front seat belts:
On pregnant women in particular, the lap
across the body, making certain that it is belt must be positioned as low as 1. Pull out seat belt a little way.
not twisted. possible across the pelvis so as not to put 2. Press down button on adjuster slide.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle. The too much pressure on the abdomen.
3. Move adjuster slide up or down.
front seat backrest must not be tilted back
too far or the seat belt will not operate Loose clothing affects the snug fit of the 4. Allow sliding adjuster to audibly latch.
properly. The recommended angle of seat belt. The seat belt must not be routed
over hard or breakable objects in the Do not adjust height while driving.
inclination is 25. Make sure that the lap
belt is not twisted and that it fits snugly pockets of your clothing (e.g. ballpoint
across the body. Tension the belt pens, keys, glasses) because this can cause
frequently while driving by tugging the injuries. Do not place objects (e.g.
diagonal part of the belt. handbags, mobile phones) between the
seat belt and your body.
Seats, interior 89
Three-point seat belts on rear outer seats

When not in use, pass seat belts through
side holders 3 as shown in Fig. 17063 T on
page 71.
Three-point seat belt of centre rear seat 3
The seat belt can only be pulled from the
inertia reel when the backrests are upright
and properly engaged see page 71.
Three-point seat belts of rear seats in
Astra TwinTop
To prevent the seat belts from making
flapping noise when the sunroof and/or the
windows are open, the seat belts of
unoccupied rear seats can be secured
Adjust height such that seat belt passes Removing the belt behind the armrest.
over wearers shoulder and rests against To remove seat belt, press red button on
the shoulder. It must not pass over the neck buckle and seat belt will retract
or upper arm. automatically.
90 Seats, interior
Child restraint system 3 Permissible options for fitting a child safety seat1)
When a child restraint system is used,
follow the instructions for use and Weight and On front passenger
On outer rear seats On centre rear seat3)
installation. age class2) seat
The country in which you are travelling Group 0:
may not permit the use of child restraint up to 10 kg
systems on certain seats. Always comply or approx.
with the local or national regulations. 10 months B 1, + U, + U
Selecting the right system Group 0+:
Your child should travel facing backwards up to 13 kg
in the car for as long as possible. A child or approx.
has a very weak cervical spinal column and 2 years
in the event of an accident is less likely
to suffer injury in a rearward-facing, Group I:
semi-lying position than if seated upright. 9 to18 kg
or approx. B 2, +
9 Warning 8 months to
U, + U
4 years
Never carry child restraint systems on
your lap, risk of fatal injury. Group II:
15 to 25 kg
or approx.
3 to 7 years
X U U
Group III:
22 to 36 kg
or approx.
6 to 12 years
1)
For reasons of safety, we recommend that the child safety seat be installed
on one of the outer rear seats.
2)
We recommend the use of each system until the child reaches the upper weight limit.
3)
Not on Astra TwinTop.
Seats, interior 91
B1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy Note

recognition and Vauxhall child z Children under 12 years or less than
restraint system with transponders. 150 cm tall should always travel in an
If the child restraint system is being appropriate child restraint system.
secured using a three-point seat z When transporting children, use the child
belt, move seat height adjustment 3 restraint systems suitable for the childs
to uppermost position. Move front weight.
passenger seat as far back as
z Ensure correct installation of child
possible and move front passenger
restraint system, see the instructions
seat belt anchorage point to lowest
enclosed with the system.
position.
z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint
B2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy
system can be wiped clean.
recognition and Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders. z Do not stick anything on the child
Mounting brackets 3 for ISOFIX child
restraint systems and do not cover them
If the child restraint system is being restraint systems
with any other materials.
secured using a three-point seat The brackets located between the backrest
belt, move seat height adjustment 3 z Only allow the child to enter and exit on and seat cushion are used for mounting
to uppermost position. Move front the side of the vehicle facing away from ISOFIX child restraint systems.
passenger seat as far back as the road.
Please follow the instructions
possible so that vehicle safety belt z A child restraint system which has been accompanying the ISOFIX child restraint
runs from anchorage point towards subjected to stress in an accident must system.
the front. be replaced.
Only ISOFIX child restraint systems
U = Universal suitability in conjunction z Secure or remove child restraint systems approved for the vehicle may be used.
with three-point seat belt. carried in the vehicle when not in use.
+ = Vehicle seat with ISOFIX fixings
available. When using ISOFIX, only
ISOFIX child restraint systems
approved for the vehicle may be
used.
X = No child restraint system permitted
in this weight class.
92 Seats, interior
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system Side airbag system 3 Curtain airbag system 3
The Vauxhall Full Size airbag system The side airbag is triggered in the event of The curtain airbag system triggers in case
consists of several separate systems. a side-on collision to form a safety cushion of a side-on collision and provides a safety
for the driver or front passenger in the barrier in the head area on the respective
Front airbag system respective door area. This substantially side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of
The front airbag system will be triggered in reduces the risk of injury to the upper body injury to the head considerably in case of a
the event of a serious accident involving a and pelvis. side-on collision.
frontal impact and forms safety cushions
for the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the driver and front
passenger is checked and the risk of
injuries to the upper body and head
thereby substantially reduced.
Seats, interior 93
Exception:
Passenger seat with seat occupancy
recognition system 3. The seat occupancy
recognition system deactivates the front
and side airbags on the passenger side 3 if
the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a
Vauxhall child restraint system with
transponders 3 has been fitted to the front
passenger seat. Seat occupancy
recognition, see page 99. Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3, see
page 90.
Examples of events triggering the front
airbag system:
Vauxhall Full Size airbag system z seat occupancy recognition 3, z Impact against a non-yielding obstacle:
the front airbags are triggered at low
Front airbag z the control indicator for Vauxhall child vehicle speed.
The front airbag system is identified by the restraint systems y with transponders 3
word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and in the instrument panel. z Impact against a yielding obstacle (such
above the glove compartment. as another vehicle): the front airbags are
The front airbag system will be triggered: only triggered at a higher vehicle speed.
The front airbag system comprises: z depending on the severity of the
z an airbag with inflator in the steering accident,
wheel and a second one in the
z depending on the type of impact,
instrument panel,
z within the range shown in the illustration,
z control electronics with impact sensors,
z independent of side airbag 3 and
z control indicator for airbag systems v in
curtain airbag system 3.
instrument panel,
94 Seats, interior
When triggered, the front airbags inflate in

milliseconds to form a safety cushion for 9 Warning 9 Warning
the driver and front passenger. The
forward movement of the front seat The front airbag system provides The three-point seat belt must be
occupants is checked, thereby optimum protection when the seat, correctly fitted, see page 88.
substantially reducing the risk of injury to backrest and head restraint are correctly
adjusted: Adjust the drivers seat The front airbag system will not be
the upper body and head.
according to the occupants height such triggered in the event of
No impairment of view will occur, because that with the driver sitting upright the z the ignition is switched off
the airbags inflate and deflate so quickly steering wheel is held in the area of its z minor frontal collisions
that it is often not even noticed in an upper spokes with the drivers arms
accident. slightly bent. The passenger seat should z accidents in which the vehicle overturns
be as far back as possible, with the z collisions involving a side or rear-impact
backrest upright, see pages 3, 67. Do not
that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to
place the head, body, hands or feet on
the occupants.
the covers of the airbag systems.
Do not place any objects in the area in
which the airbags inflate. Important
information, see page 101.
Seats, interior 95
9 Warning
Seat belts must therefore always be worn.
The front airbag system serves to
supplement the three-point seat belts. If
you do not wear your seat belt you risk
being seriously injured, or even thrown
from the vehicle, in the event of an
accident.
In the event of an accident the seat belt
helps to keep you seated in the correct
position, so that the front airbag system
can provide you with effective protection.
Side airbag 3 The side airbag system will be triggered:
In addition, the front airbag system will not The side airbag system is identified by the z depending on the severity of the
be triggered for the front passenger in word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the accident,
versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 front seat backrests.
if z depending on the type of impact,
z the front passenger seat is unoccupied, The side airbag system comprises: z within the range shown in the illustration
z an airbag with inflator in the back of the on the centre door pillar of the drivers or
z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child drivers and front passenger seat
restraint system with transponders 3. front passenger side,
respectively,
Seat occupancy recognition, see z independently of the front airbag
page 99. Vauxhall child restraint system z the control electronics, system.
with transponders 3, see page 90. z the side-impact sensors, Exception:
z control indicator for airbag systems v in Passenger seat with seat occupancy
instrument panel, recognition system 3. The seat occupancy
z seat occupancy recognition 3, recognition system deactivates the front
and side airbags on the passenger side 3 if
z the control indicator for Vauxhall child the front passenger seat is unoccupied or a
restraint systems y with transponders 3 Vauxhall child restraint system with
in the instrument panel. transponders 3 has been fitted to the front
passenger seat. Seat occupancy
recognition, see page 99. Vauxhall child
restraint system with transponders 3, see
page 90.
96 Seats, interior
In addition, the side airbag system 3 will

9 Warning not be triggered for the front passenger in
versions with seat occupancy recognition 3
There must be no objects in the area in if
which the airbag inflates or in the area z the front passenger seat is unoccupied
between the seat backs and the vehicle
body. Do not place the hands or arms on z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child
the covers of the airbag systems. restraint system with transponders 3.
Important information, see page 101. Seat occupancy recognition, see
page 99. Vauxhall child restraint system
The three-point seat belt must always be with transponders 3, see page 90.
correctly fitted, see page 88.
The side airbags will not be triggered in the

event of
When triggered, the side airbag inflates z the ignition is switched off
within milliseconds to form a safety cushion z frontal collisions
for the driver or front passenger in the
respective door area. This substantially z accidents in which the vehicle overturns
reduces the risk of injury to the upper body z collisions involving a rear-impact
and pelvis in the event of a side-on
z side-on collisions outside the passenger
collision.
cell.
Seats, interior 97
Curtain airbag 3 The curtain airbag system will be triggered: When the curtain airbag is triggered it
The curtain airbag system is identified by z depending on the severity of the inflates within milliseconds and provides a
the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. accident, safety barrier in the head area on the
The curtain airbag system comprises: z depending on the type of impact, respective side of the vehicle. This reduces
z an airbag with inflator in the roof frame the risk of injury to the head considerably in
z within the range shown in the illustration case of a side-impact.
on the drivers and front passenger side on the centre door pillar of the drivers or
respectively, front passenger side,
z the control electronics, z together with the side airbag system 3,
z the side-impact sensors, z irrespective of seat occupancy
z control indicator for airbag systems v in recognition 3,
instrument panel. z independently of the front airbag
system.
98 Seats, interior
9 Warning 9 Warning
There must be no objects in the area in Have the cause of the fault eliminated
which the airbag inflates. Do not place immediately by a workshop.
the hands or arms on the covers of the
airbag systems. Important information, The systems integrated self-diagnostics
see page 101. allows faults to be quickly remedied.
The three-point seat belt must always be

correctly fitted, see page 88.
The curtain airbags will not be triggered in

the event of
z the ignition is switched off
z frontal collisions Control indicator v for airbag systems
The function of the airbag systems is
z accidents in which the vehicle overturns monitored electronically together with the
z collisions involving a rear-impact seat occupancy recognition 3 and belt
tensioner systems and the deployable
z side-on collisions outside the passenger
anti-roll bars 3. Their operational
cell.
readiness is indicated by a control
indicator v. When the ignition is switched
on, the control indicator illuminates for
approx. 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate,
does not go out after 4 seconds or
illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in
the airbag systems, seat occupancy
recognition 3 or belt tensioner systems, or
in the deployable anti-roll bars 3, see
page 87. The systems may fail to trigger in
the event of an accident.
Deployment of the airbags is indicated by
continuous illumination of v.
Seats, interior 99
Seat occupancy recognition 3

The seat occupancy recognition system 9 Warning
deactivates the front and side airbags 3
for the front passenger if the front Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with
passenger seat is not occupied or a transponders 3 can be fitted on the front
Vauxhall child restraint system with passenger seats. Use of systems without
transponders 3 is fitted on the front transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.
passenger seat. The curtain airbag system
Vauxhall child restraint systems with
3 remains activated.
transponders 3 can be identified by a
The control indicator y for seat sticker.
occupancy recognition is located in the
Note
instrument panel. If the control indicator y
On the Astra TwinTop, there may be
illuminates for approx. 4 seconds when the
interference in radio reception of certain
ignition is switched on, the vehicle is
frequencies in the medium waveband
equipped with seat occupancy recognition, Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition when the roof is open and the front
see Fig. 17117 T on page 100. are also identified by a sticker on the lower passenger seat is unoccupied.
If a Vauxhall child restraint system with panel of the front passenger seats see
transponders 3 is fitted, the control figure above.
indicator y illuminates continuously after Vauxhall child restraint systems with
the ignition is switched on as soon as the transponders 3 are automatically
system has detected the child restraint detected if correctly fitted to the front
system. Only then may the child restraint passenger seat. When this type of child
system with transponders 3 be used on the restraint system is in use on the front
passenger seat. passenger seat, the front and side airbag
systems for the front passenger seat are
deactivated. The curtain airbag system
remains activated. Pay attention to control
indicator y for seat occupancy
recognition 3 see page 100.
100 Seats, interior
Control indicator y for Vauxhall child If the control indicator flashes when the
restraint systems with transponders 3 child restraint system with transponders 3
The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint is correctly fitted, there is a fault with risk of
system with transponders 3 is indicated injury to the child. Fit child restraint systems
after the ignition has been switched on by on the rear seat. Have the cause of the
continuous illumination of the control fault eliminated by a workshop.
indicator y in the instrument panel, as If no Vauxhall child restraint system with
soon as the seat occupancy recognition transponders 3 is fitted, the control
system has detected the child restraint indicator must not illuminate or flash as the
system. passenger airbag systems would not
deploy. Have the cause of the fault
eliminated by a workshop.
9 Warning
If the control indicator does not come on
while driving, the front and side airbags 3 If the Vauxhall child restraint system with
for the passenger are not deactivated and transponders 3 has been fitted
there is a risk of injury or death to the child. according to the instructions, the control
Fit child restraint systems on the rear seat. indicator for Vauxhall restraint systems
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a with transponders must illuminate in the
workshop. instrument panel when the ignition is
switched on.
If the child restraint system is not correctly
installed or the transponder is faulty, the If the control indicator does not come on
control indicator flashes. Check for correct while driving, the airbag systems for the
installation of child restraint system. To passenger are not deactivated and there
install the child restraint system with is a risk of fatal injury. In this case, fit child
transponders 3, see the instructions restraint systems on the rear seat. Have
enclosed with the system. the cause of the fault eliminated by a
workshop.
Seats, interior 101
Important z Do not bond or use other material to z Each airbag or deployable roll-over
z Do not affix or place accessories or other cover the steering wheel, dashboard, bar 3 deploys once only. Have a
objects within the expansion range of front seat backrests and roof frame in workshop replace deployed airbags
airbag systems or extending anti-roll the area of the airbags and the seat immediately.
bars 3 is not permitted, since this could cushion of the passenger seat or the z The speeds, directions of movement and
result in injuries if the components are covers of the deployable anti-roll bars 3. deformation properties of the vehicles,
actuated. z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to and the properties of the obstacle
z Do not place any objects between the clean the steering wheel, instrument concerned, determine the severity of the
airbag systems/anti-roll bar covers 3 panel, front seat backrests, roof frame accident and triggering of the airbags.
and the occupants. Risk of injury. and seat cushion of the front passenger The degree of damage to your vehicle
seat. Do not use any aggressive cleaning and the resulting repair costs alone are
9 Warning agents. not indicative that the criteria for
z Only protective covers which are triggering of the airbags were met.
Never carry child restraint systems or
approved for your vehicle with side z Do not make any modifications to
other objects on your lap risk of fatal
airbag 3 may be fitted on the front components of the airbag systems or the
injury.
seats. When fitting the protective covers, anti-roll bars 3 as this would render the
make sure that the airbag units on the vehicle unroadworthy.
z Use the hooks in the roof frame only to
outboard sides of the front seat
hang up light articles of clothing or coat
hangers. Do not place any objects in the
backrests are not covered. 9 Warning
pockets of the hanging items risk of z The airbag systems are triggered
The systems can be triggered abruptly
injury. independently of each other based on
and cause injury if they are handled
the severity of the accident and the type
z The control electronics of the airbag improperly.
of impact. The side airbag system 3 and
systems, belt tensioners and deployable
the curtain airbag system 3 are
anti-roll bars 3 are located in the centre z We recommend having the steering
triggered together.
console area. Do not store any magnetic wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling
objects in the area as they could cause z Astra TwinTop: The deployable anti-roll parts, the door seals, the handles and
malfunction. bars 3 are deployed together with the the seats removed by a workshop.
front and side airbag systems 3
depending on the severity of the impact.
102 Seats, interior
z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety z In order to prevent malfunctions when
instructions given for this must be using a Vauxhall child restraint system
observed. Take the vehicle to a recycling with transponders 3 on the front
company for disposal. passenger seat, no objects (e.g. plastic
z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be
only travel on the rear seats. This does placed under the child restraint system.
not apply to children who are travelling
in child restraint systems with
9 Warning
transponders 3.
Child restraint systems as well as other
z In vehicles with seat occupancy objects must never be carried on the lap
recognition 3, do not place any heavy of passengers; risk of fatal injury. If
objects on the front passenger seat carried in this way, child restraint systems
otherwise the airbag systems for the with transponders 3 in vehicles with seat
front passenger seat may be triggered in occupancy recognition 3 could lead to
the event of an accident. front passenger airbag systems not Use of child restraint systems 3 on the
being triggered in the event of an front passenger seat in vehicles with
z In vehicles with seat occupancy airbag systems, but without seat
recognition 3, to prevent malfunctions accident.
occupancy recognition 3
do not use protective covers or seat
cushions on the front passenger seat. 9 Warning
No child restraint system 3 may be
installed on front passenger seat. Danger
to life.
Versions with front passenger airbag can

be identified by the word AIRBAG over the
glove compartment and the warning
sticker on the side of the instrument panel,
visible when the passenger door is open -
see Fig. 17118 A.
Seats, interior 103
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition

are identified by a sticker on the lower
panel of the front passenger seat, see
Fig. 17116 T.
Version with side airbag system 3 is Use of child restraint systems 3 on front
indicated by AIRBAG text on outer side of passenger seat in vehicles with airbag
front seat backrests. systems and seat occupancy recognition 3
Seat occupancy recognition 3, see
page 99.
9 Warning
Only Vauxhall child restraint systems with
transponders 3 can be fitted on the front
passenger seats. Use of systems without
transponders poses a risk of fatal injury.
104 Seats, interior
Rollover protection system 3

The Astra TwinTop is equipped with
rollover protection with reinforced
windscreen frame and anti-roll bars behind
the rear seat head restraints. Depending
on the variant, the anti-roll bars are either
fixed or deploy automatically in the event
of an impact of a certain severity. The
subsequent description only regards the
variant with automatically deployed
anti-roll bars 3.
Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition Vauxhall child restraint systems with
can also be identified by control transponders 3 are marked with a sticker
indicator y in the instrument panel. or sew-on badge, see Fig. 17424 T.
If control indicator y illuminates for
approx. 4 seconds when the ignition is
switched on, the vehicle is equipped with
seat occupancy recognition see page 99.
The seat occupancy recognition system
detects Vauxhall child restraint systems
with transponders 3 and deactivates the
front and side airbag systems 3 for the
front passenger seat. The curtain airbag
system 3 remains activated. For seat
occupancy recognition see page 99.
Seats, interior 105
In the event of a rollover, the anti-roll bars Control indicator v for extending anti-roll Extended anti-roll bars
deploy upwards in a matter of bars can be retracted (e.g. in order to close the
milliseconds. They also deploy together The deployable anti-roll bars are roof after a collision).
with the front and side airbag systems 3, monitored electronically together with the Press the lever between the rods of an
helping to optimise occupant protection. belt tensioners and the airbag systems. anti-roll bar to unlock the system. Push the
The system deploys with the roof open or Their operational readiness is indicated by anti-roll bar all the way down until it
closed. If the anti-roll bars are extended control indicator v in the instrument panel. engaged. Fit the cover.
the roof must not be operated, see When the ignition is switched on, the
control indicator illuminates for approx. Repeat the procedure on the other anti-roll
instructions in the following columns. bar.
4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does
not go out after 4 seconds or illuminates Control indicator v, however, will remain
whilst driving, there is a fault in or illuminated and the anti-roll bars will not
deployment of the anti-roll bars, belt deploy in the event of another collision.
tensioners and airbag systems - see
page 87. The systems may fail to trigger in 6
the event of an accident.
Actuation of the anti-roll bars is indicated
by continuous illumination of v.
106 Seats, interior
Have the cause of the fault eliminated Note z Deployment of the anti-roll bars is
immediately by a workshop. z Do not place any objects on the covers of indicated by illumination of control
the anti-roll bars behind the head indicator v.
9 Warning restraints. They would be propelled z If an attempt is made to operate the roof
through the vehicle in an uncontrolled while the anti-roll bars are extended, a
The roof cannot be closed or opened if fashion should the anti-roll bars deploy. continuous signal will sound as a
the anti-roll bars are extended. The Such objects could also prevent the warning.
anti-roll bars must first be retracted. anti-roll bars from extending.
After deployment of the anti-roll bar, z Do not operate the roof while the anti-roll
have the system repaired by a workshop bars are extended. Parts of the roof
immediately. could be damaged during such
Manually retracted anti-roll bars will not operation.
deploy in the event of a collision.
Seats, interior 107
Cigarette lighter 3 Press in cigarette lighter. Switches off Accessory socket 3

The cigarette lighter is in the front centre automatically once the element is glowing. Some vehicles have an accessory socket for
console, beneath the ashtray cover. Pull out lighter. the connection of electrical accessories
The ashtray cover opens when pressed at instead of a cigarette lighter. Use of the
the point indicated. accessory socket while the engine is not
running will discharge the battery.
6
108 Seats, interior
Electrical accessories connected to

the socket must comply with the
electromagnetic compatibility
requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839,
otherwise vehicle malfunctions may occur.
If the tyre repair set is 3 is in operation, no
consumers may be connected to the
auxiliary socket.
Estates have an additional accessory Ashtray 3

socket 3 in the luggage compartment. To be used only for ash and not for
Do not damage the sockets by using combustible rubbish.
unsuitable plugs.
The maximum power consumption of
9 Warning
electrical accessories must not exceed Failure to observe these descriptions can
120 watts. lead to injuries which may be fatal.
Do not connect any current-delivering Vehicle passengers should be informed
accessories, e.g. electrical charging accordingly.
devices or batteries.
Front ashtray
The ashtray is in the front centre console
beneath a cover.
The cover opens when pressed at the point
indicated.
Seats, interior 109
To empty, grip both sides of the ashtray Rear ashtray 3 To empty, open the ashtray, press the
insert at the spots illustrated and pull The ashtray is in the rear centre console. spring (arrow) and pull the ashtray straight
upwards. Pull out the ashtray by pushing on one of out rearwards.
the sides.
110 Seats, interior
Foldaway tables 3
on the front seat backrests.
Open by pulling upward until it engages.
Fold away by pressing down past the
resistance point.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
table.
Stowage compartments Stowage compartment in front armrest 3

Glove compartment To open, press button and open upper part
To open, pull handle upwards. of armrest.
The glove compartment shelf 3 can be
removed: Disengage the shelf by pulling on
the front edge.
Refit the shelf by sliding it into the side
guide strips and engage it in the rear panel
by pushing.
The front of the open cover houses a pen
holder and a coin compartment.
The glove compartment should be closed
while driving.
Cooled glove compartment 3, see
page 156.
Seats, interior 111
Sun visors
Use the sun visor to protect from glare by
pulling it down and swivelling it to the
side 3.
The covers of the mirrors in the sun visors
should be closed while driving.
On vehicles with panoramic windscreen 3,
close the sun visors before moving the roof
lining.
Stowage compartment for glasses 3

On drivers side: fold down to open.
Do not store heavy objects in the stowage
compartment.
Cargo box 3
See page 81.
112 Instruments, controls
Instruments,
controls
Control indicators The electronic key is in the wrong

The control indicators described here are location in the vehicle interior
not present in all vehicles. The description (do not put key in luggage
Control indicators ................................ 112 applies to all instrument versions. compartment or in front of
Instrument display ............................... 119 information display), or the
The control indicator colours mean: electronic key is not in the vehicle
Information display ............................. 122
z Red Danger, important reminder interior, or influence from an
Warning buzzers.................................. 140 external interference source (radio
Windscreen wiper ................................ 141 z Yellow Warning, note, fault
masts, interfering transmitters in the
z Green On confirmation vicinity).
z Blue On confirmation or
Electronic key failure, for emergency
0 operation, see page 37.
Open&Start system 3 If the battery in the electronic key needs
Control indicator illuminates or flashes changing, InSP3 appears in the service
yellow. display or, in vehicles with check control 3,
If it flashes by an appropriate message in the
System has not detected electronic key in information display - see pages 39, 120.
vehicle interior. The reasons for this
may be:
Instruments, controls 113
Illuminates
I 9 Warning
Fault in Open&Start system.
Engine oil pressure
Lock or unlock vehicle using remote Control indicator illuminates red. When the engine is off, considerably
control or emergency key if necessary, see more force is needed to brake and steer.
It illuminates when the ignition is switched
page 43, or attempt to use the spare key.
on and goes out shortly after the engine Do not remove key until vehicle has come
Emergency operation, see page 44. starts. to a standstill, otherwise the steering
If 0 illuminates, this can also mean that Illuminates when the engine is running column lock could engage unexpectedly.
the steering column lock is still locked: Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This
move steering wheel to and fro a little and may result in damage to the engine and/or Contact a workshop for assistance.
press Start/Stop button again. locking of the drive wheels:
If 0 illuminates whilst driving a system 1. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly
error has occurred that may eventually as possible without impeding other
lead to a complete failure. vehicles.
If 0 illuminates or flashes: The Start/Stop 2. Depress clutch.
button must be held depressed somewhat
3. Shift manual transmission or
longer to switch off the ignition. It is
Easytronic 3 into neutral; for automatic
possible that the vehicle will not start
transmission 3, set selector lever to N.
during the next start attempt.
4. Switch off ignition.
If these flash continuously or if 0
illuminates, contact a workshop
immediately.
v
Airbag systems 3, belt tensioners 3,
deployable anti-roll bars 3
Control indicator illuminates red.
Illuminates when the engine is running
Fault in airbag system, belt tensioners
or extending anti-roll bars, see pages 87,
98, 104
v
Electronic Stability Programme
(ESPPlus) 3
Control indicator flashes or illuminates
yellow.
R
Brake system, clutch system 9 Warning Flashing during driving
Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. System actively engaged, see
If it illuminates when the handbrake is pages 210, 210, 239.
It illuminates after the ignition is turned on, released: stop vehicle immediately.
when the handbrake is applied or if the Contact a workshop for assistance. Illuminates while driving
brake or clutch fluid level is too low. For System switched off or fault in system for
further information see pages 222, 302. Electronic Stability Program, see page 210.
For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control X
indicator flashes for a few seconds when Seat belt 3
the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is Control indicator illuminates or flashes red.
not applied.
Illuminates when the ignition is turned on,
until the seat belt is fastened. After starting
to drive, the control indicator flashes.
Fasten seat belt, see page 88.
Q A j
Doors and luggage compartment open Engine electronics, Easytronic 3, start engine
Control indicator illuminates red. transmission electronics 3, Control indicator illuminates yellow.
It is illuminated when a door or the luggage immobiliser, It illuminates if the footbrake is not
compartment is open. diesel fuel filter 3 operated. The indicator goes off as soon as
Control indicator illuminates or flashes the footbrake is operated. The engine can
p yellow. only be started with the footbrake
Alternator It illuminates for a few seconds when the operated, see page 182.
Control indicator illuminates red. ignition is switched on.
It illuminates when the ignition is switched IDS+
Illuminates when the engine is running
on and goes out shortly after the engine Interactive Driving System 3,
Fault in engine or gearbox electronic
starts. Continuous Damping Control (CDC) 3,
system. Electronics have switched to
SPORT mode 3
Illuminates when the engine is running emergency running programme fuel
Control indicator illuminates yellow.
Stop, switch off engine. Battery is not consumption may be increased and the
charging. Cooling may be faulty. For diesel vehicles driveability reduced, see It illuminates for a few seconds when the
engines, the effect of the brake servo may page 206. Contact a workshop ignition is switched on.
be lost. Contact a workshop immediately. immediately. Illuminates while driving
Illuminated together with InSP4 in the Fault in system. Contact a workshop
W service display: Have the diesel fuel filter immediately.
Coolant temperature drained of water see page 300. IDS+ see page 209,
Control indicator illuminates red.
Flashes when the ignition is on CDC see page 211,
Illuminates when the engine is running Fault in the electronic immobiliser system; SPORT mode see page 212.
Stop and switch off engine. Coolant the engine cannot be started, see page 31.
temperature too high: Risk of engine
damage. Check coolant level immediately
see page 300.
O
Turn signal lights
Control indicator flashes green.
Control indicator flashes at the side
concerned.
Both control indicators flash with the
hazard warning lights on.
Fast flashing: failure of a turn signal light
or associated fuse, failure of turn signal
light on trailer 3.
Change bulbs, see page 269. Fuses, see
page 262.
S 8 Y
Engine oil level 3 Exterior lights Fuel level
Control indicator illuminates yellow. Control indicator illuminates green. Control indicator illuminates or flashes
The engine oil level is checked1) It is illuminated when the exterior lights are yellow.
automatically. on see page 143. Illuminates
Illuminates when the engine is running Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserve area.
r
Engine oil level too low. Check engine oil Flashing
Parking distance sensor 3
level and top up engine oil if necessary, see Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately.
Control indicator illuminates yellow.
page 298.
Fault in system. Contact a workshop Never let the tank run dry!
immediately. Erratic fuel supply can cause catalytic
Parking distance sensor, see page 215. converter to overheat, see page 204.
Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed
the fuel system as described on page 241.
1)
Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine. Sales
designation see page 310.
> T Z
Winter programme of automatic
Fog lights 3 Exhaust emission 3
transmission 3 or Easytronic 3
Control indicator illuminates green. Control indicator illuminates or flashes
Control indicator illuminates in gear
It is illuminated when the fog lights are on yellow.
display with Winter programme engaged.
see page 145. It illuminates when the ignition is switched
Further information, see
on and goes out shortly after the engine
C pages 180, 186, 193.
starts.
Main beam
Control indicator illuminates blue.
1 Illuminates when the engine is running
SPORT mode of automatic transmission 3 Fault in emission control system. The
It is illuminated when main beam is on or Easytronic 3 permitted emissions may be exceeded.
and during headlight flash see Control indicator illuminates in gear Contact a workshop immediately.
pages 11, 144. display with Sport programme engaged. If it flashes when the engine is running:
r Further information, see Fault which could lead to damage to the
Fog tail light pages 179, 185, 192. catalytic converter, see page 206. Contact
Control indicator illuminates yellow. a workshop immediately.
y
It is illuminated when the fog tail lights are Seat occupancy recognition 3 u
on see page 145. Control indicator illuminates or flashes in Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 3
odometer display. Control indicator illuminates red.
Illuminates Illuminates while driving
Seat occupancy recognition has detected Fault in anti-lock brake system, see
a child restraint system with transponders. page 224.
Airbag systems for the passenger are
deactivated, see page 99.
If it flashes
Fault in system or child seats with
transponder incorrectly fitted, see page 99.
w
Deflation detection system 3,
tyre pressure monitoring system 3
Control indicator illuminates red
Tyre pressure loss see page 218.
Control indicator illuminates yellow
Fault in system, see pages 218, 219.
Contact a workshop for assistance.
B
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL)
Control indicator flashes yellow.
Flashing
! The self-cleaning function will Fault in system. Contact a workshop
Preheating system 3, automatically operate while driving after immediately.
diesel particle filter 3 the engine has reached its normal Flashes for 4 seconds when ignition
Control indicator illuminates or flashes operating temperature. The control switched on
yellow. indicator ! will continue to flash until the System converted for driving abroad.
Illuminates self-cleaning operation is complete. This
may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The AFL, see page 147.
Preheating system active, switches on only
if outside temperature is low.
speeds. m
Flashing Cruise control 3
(on vehicles with diesel particle filter) Further information, see page 207. Control indicator illuminates green.
The driving situation is such that the diesel It is illuminated when the system is on see
particle filter self-cleaning function can not page 213.
operate automatically. You may continue
to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle
will not be damaged and does not require
service.
Instrument display Speedometer Fuel gauge

On some versions, the pointer of the Speed display. Pointer in = Reserve area
tachometer, speedometer and fuel gauge left zone or
briefly moves to its end position when the Y illuminated
ignition is switched on. Pointer in = Refuelling, see
Tachometer left zone or page 202
Indicates engine speed. Y flashing
Warning zone: Maximum permissible Never run the tank dry!
engine speed exceeded; danger to engine. Diesel engines: If the tank is run dry, bleed
the fuel system as described on page 241.
Because of the fuel remaining in the tank,
the amount of fuel required to fill the tank
may be less than the specified tank
capacity.
Time display 3
To adjust the time, setting button in
instrument panel:
Press for approx. 2 seconds:
Hours flash
Press briefly
Set hours
Press for approx. 2 seconds
Minutes flash
Press briefly
Set minutes
Press for approx. 2 seconds
Clock is started.
Odometer display Bottom line: Service Display

Top line: Odometer InSP Service interval display. Shows
Trip odometer or clock display 3 Records the miles counted. distance remaining to next
To switch between the trip odometer and service. Further notes, see
the clock display 3, press reset button page 296.
briefly, see page 119. InSP2 Faulty bulb 3, see page 269.
Trip odometer InSP3 Battery voltage of remote control
Display of miles covered since reset. or electronic key in Open&Start
To reset, hold reset button down for system low 3, see pages 34, 39.
around one second with the ignition turned InSP4 Drain water from diesel fuel
on, see page 119. filter 3. Contact a workshop for
If the clock display is activated, first switch assistance.
to trip odometer. On vehicles with check control 3, an
appropriate message is shown on the info
display instead of InSP2 and InSP3.
ESPoff Electronic Stability Programme 3 For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a
off, see page 210. few seconds if A, M or R is selected when
the engine is running but the footbrake is
ESPon Electronic Stability Programme 3 not depressed.
on, see page 210.
Transmission display 3
Display of gear selected in automatic
transmissions 3 or current gear or mode for
Easytronic 3:
P Part position on automatic
transmission
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
A Automatic mode on Easytronic
M Manual mode on Easytronic
D Automatic mode on automatic
transmission
1-4 Current gear on automatic
transmission
1-5 Manual mode, current gear for
1 - 6 3 Easytronic
12:01 17 ,0C 11:25 } 21 .5C BC 1 All values
BC 2
FM 3 90,6 MHz Range Timer 1
257.0 miles
REG AS RDS TP
RDS [TP]
40 mph
7.0
257miles 8 31.0
gal
mpg
Information display Board information display 3 Graphical information display 3,

Triple information display Display of time, outside temperature and colour information display 3
Display of time, outside temperature and date/infotainment system (when it is on). Display of time, outside temperature, date/
date/infotainment system (when it is on). F in the display indicates a fault. Have the infotainment system (when it is on) and
cause eliminated by a workshop. climate control system 3.
When the ignition is off, the time, date and
outside temperature can be presented for The graphical information display presents
15 seconds by briefly pressing one of the the information in monochrome. The colour
two buttons below the display. information display presents the
information in colour.
F in the display indicates a fault. Have the
cause eliminated by a workshop.
The type of information and how it is

displayed depends on the equipment of
the vehicle and the settings of the
Infotainment system 3, the trip
computer 3 and the climate control :
system 3. 8:56 -5 ,5C
Some information appears in the display in Slippery road
an abbreviated form. 07.04.2004 -2,5C
Infotainment system, see Infotainment
system instructions. Climate control
system, see page 168. OK
F in the display indicates a fault. Have the
cause eliminated by a workshop.
Outside temperature In vehicles with graphical information
A fall in temperature is indicated display 3 or colour information display 3, a
immediately and a rise in temperature warning message appears the display as a
after a time delay. warning for icy road surfaces. There is no
message below -5 C.
If outside temperature drops to 3 C, the
symbol : illuminates in the triple 9 Warning
information display or the board
information display 3 as a warning for icy Caution: The road surface may already
road surfaces. : remains illuminated until be icy even though the display indicates
temperatures reach at least 5 C. a few degrees above 0 C.
Correcting time 3 Deactivating/activating automatic time

Some RDS transmitters do not send a synchronisation: infotainment system off,
correct time signal. If the incorrect time is press and ; below the display:
8:56 5 ,5C continually displayed, switch off automatic Hold down for approx. 2 sec., clock
time synchronisation 3 and set the time display is now in setting mode.
manually - see next column.
07.04.2004 The automatic setting is indicated by } in
Press twice (until year flashes).
the display. Press and hold down for approx.
3 seconds until } flashes in display 3 and
"RDS TIME" appears (years flash during
this time).
Press ;, indication on display:
RDS TIME 0 = off.
Press ;, indication on display:
Triple information display RDS TIME 1 = on.
Set date and time
Infotainment system off: press and ; Press three times.
below the display as follows:
Press for approx. 2 seconds:
Day flashes
;: Set day
: Month flashes
;: Set month
: Year flashes
;: Set year
: Hours flash
;: Set hours
: Minutes flash
;: Set minutes
: Clock is started.
11:25 } 21 .5C
Range
257miles
Board information display 3, Selection with arrow keys Select using the left adjuster wheel 3 on
selecting functions Select the menu points using the buttons the steering wheel
Functions and settings of some on the Infotainment system Turn up
equipment 3 can be accessed via the OK button Previous menu point.
board information display. Select marked point, confirm command. Turn down
This is done using the menus and buttons Next menu point.
of the Infotainment System 3 or with the Press
left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. Select marking, confirm commands.
The corresponding menu options then System settings see page 131.
appear in the next line of the display.
Trip computer see page 128.
If warning messages from Check-control 3
are shown, the display is blocked for other
information. Confirm the warning
message. If there are several warning
messages, confirm these in succession.
The functions are displayed in the following

order:
z Time synchronisation
z Time, setting hours
11:25 } 21 .5C z Time, setting minutes 11:25 } 21 .5C
z Date, setting day
z Date, setting month
System z Date, setting year Clock Sync.On
z Ignition logic
z Language selection
z Setting units of measure
Board information display 3, Correcting time 3

system settings Some RDS transmitters do not send correct
Press the Settings button of the time signals. If the incorrect time is
infotainment system. Menu item Audio or displayed often, deactivate automatic
System will appear. time synchronisation 3 and set the time
manually.
Press left arrow key to access menu point
System. Select menu point System. The
first function of the menu System is shown.
Some information appears in the display in
an abbreviated form.
The automatic setting is indicated by } in

the display.
To correct time with the help of RDS, select
the menu item for time synchronisation
from the Settings menu. 11:25 } 21 .5C 11:25 } 21 .5C
Make the desired setting.
Setting date and time English Unit Europe-SI
Select the menu item for time and date
setting from the Settings menu.
Make the desired setting.
The setting is saved when the menu item is
exited.
Ignition logic 3 Language selection Setting units of measure
Adjustment, see Infotainment system You can select the display language for You can select which units of measure are
instructions. some functions. to be used.
Select the menu item for language from the Select the menu item for units of measure
Settings menu and make the desired from the Settings menu and confirm the
setting. desired setting.
Board information display 3, Average consumption

trip computer 3 Average consumption display. The
The trip computer provides information on measurement can be reset to zero and
driving data, which is continually recorded restarted at any time, see "Resetting trip
and evaluated electronically. 11:25 } 21 .5C computer information to zero".
Access trip computer vehicle data by Effective consumption

Used fuel quantity display. The
pressing the BC button on the infotainment Inst. Consumpt. measurement can be reset to zero and
system or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the
steering wheel. restarted at any time, see "Resetting trip
computer information to zero".
Some information appears in the display in
an abbreviated form.
3 1 . 0 miles/gal Average speed
Average speed display. The measurement
Once an audio function has been selected, can be reset to zero and restarted at any
the subsequent rows of the trip computer time, see "Resetting trip computer
function are displayed. Instantaneous consumption information to zero".
Display changes depending on speed:
The functions are displayed in the following Stoppages in the journey with the ignition
order: Display in gal/h Below 8 mph (13 km/h) off are not included in the calculations.
z Instantaneous consumption Display in mpg Above 8 mph (13 km/h) Distance travelled
z Average consumption Driven mileage display. The measurement
z Effective consumption can be reset to zero and restarted at any
z Average speed time, see "Resetting trip computer
z Distance travelled information to zero".
z Range
z Stop watch
Resetting trip computer information to

zero (reset)
The following trip computer information
can be reset (reset and restart
11:25 } 21 .5C measurements or calculations): 11:25 } 21 .5C
z Average consumption
z Effective consumption
Range z Average speed Stop Watch
z Distance travelled.
Select the desired trip computer
257miles information. 01:22:32 h
Reset by pressing the left adjuster wheel 3
on the steering wheel or the OK button on
Range the Infotainment system. Stop watch
Range is calculated from current fuel tank Select function, operate with arrow keys:
content and instantaneous consumption. z Select Start menu item using left arrow
The display shows average values. key, start/stop by pressing OK.
After refuelling, the vehicle updates the z Select Reset menu item using right arrow
range automatically after a brief delay. key, reset by pressing OK.
If less than 30 miles (50 km) can be driven Operate using left adjuster wheel 3 on
with the fuel remaining in the tank, the steering wheel:
warning "Range" appears on the display.
z Press: start/stop.
If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven
with the fuel remaining in the tank, the Interruption of power supply
warning "Refuel!" 3 appears on the If the power supply has been interrupted or
display. if the battery voltage has dropped too low,
the values stored in the trip computer will
Acknowledge the menu item as described be lost.
on page 130.
FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3
90.6 MHz
19,5 19:36
Graphical information display 3 Selection with arrow keys To select using the multi-function button
or colour information display 3, Select menu options via menus and the Turn
selecting functions keys on the Infotainment system. Mark menu options or commands, select
OK button function ranges,
The functions and settings of some
equipment 3 can be accessed via the Select marked point, confirm command. Press
graphical information display or the colour To exit a menu, press the right or left arrow Select marking, confirm commands.
information display. key to access Return or Main. To exit a menu, turn the multi-function
These functions are marked on the menu button left or right to Return or Main and
on the display or performed using the select.
arrow keys 3 on the Infotainment system,
the multi-function button 3 on the
Infotainment system or with the left
adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
If warning messages from Check-control 3
are shown, the display is blocked for other
information. Confirm the warning
message. If there are several warning
messages, confirm these in succession.
7 Settings 19,5 19:36

FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3 Time, Date 19:36
Language
90.6 MHz Units 10 . 07 . 2004
Contrast
Day / Night
19,5 19:36 6 Ign. logic
Select using left adjuster wheel 3 on Function ranges System settings

steering wheel For each functional area there is a main The settings are accessed via the Settings
Turn up page (Main), which is selected at the top menu.
previous menu point. edge of the display (not with the Press the Main button 3 (not found on all
Turn down Infotainment system CD 30 or the infotainment systems) on the infotainment
next menu point. Mobile Phone Portal): system (call up main display).
Press z Audio Press the Settings button of the
Select marking, confirm commands. z Navigation 3 infotainment system. On Infotainment
z Telephone 3 System CD 30, make sure no menu has
z Trip computer 3. been selected.
For Audio, Navigation 3 and Telephone 3 The Settings menu is displayed.
functions see infotainment system
instructions.
Correcting time 3
In systems with GPS receiver1), date and
time are set automatically upon receipt of
7 Time, Date 19,5 19:36 a GPS satellite signal. If the displayed time 7 Settings 19,5 19:36
does not match local time, it can be
Time 19:36 Time, Date
corrected manually or automatically by
receiving an RDS time signal2) 3. Language Deutsch
Date 10 . 07 . 2004 Some RDS transmitters do not send correct Units English
time signals. If the incorrect time is Contrast Espaol
displayed often, deactivate automatic
6 Synchron. clock automatical. Day / Night Nederlands
time synchronisation 3 and set the time
manually. 6 Ign. logic Franais
To correct time with the help of RDS, select

menu item Synchron. clock automatical.
Setting the date and time 3 from the Time, Date menu. Language selection
Select menu item Time, Date from the You can select the display language for
Settings menu. The box in front of Synchron. clock some functions.
automatical. will be ticked; see
The menu for Time, Date is displayed. Fig. 17340 T. Select menu item Language from the
Select the menu items required: Settings menu.
Make the desired setting. The available languages are displayed.
1)
GPS = Global Positioning System,
satellite system for world-wide positioning.
2)
RDS = Radio Data System.
7 13 Languages 19,5 19:36 7 Settings 19,5 19:36 7 Contrast 19,5 19:36
X Deutsch Time, Date

English Language ~ Europe-SI
Espaol Units | Japan 12
Nederlands Contrast | Great Britain
Franais Day / Night | USA
Italiano 6 Ign. logic
Select the desired language. Setting units of measure Adjusting contrast 3

Selections are indicated by a 6 in front of You can select which units of measure are (graphical information display)
the menu item. to be used. Select menu item Contrast from the
Select menu item Units from the Settings Settings menu.
In systems with voice output 3, when the
language setting of the display is changed menu. The menu for Contrast is displayed.
the system will ask whether the The available units are displayed. Confirm the required setting.
announcement language should also be Select the desired unit.
changed see Infotainment system
instructions. Selections are indicated by a o in front of
the menu item.
Setting display mode 3

The display can be adjusted to suit the light
conditions, black or coloured text on a light
background or white or coloured text on a 2 Board Computer 19,5 19:36
dark background. BC 1 All values
Select menu item Day / Night from the Range 257 miles
BC 2
Settings menu. 257.0
1
miles
The options are displayed.

Timer Aver. Consump. 33.0 mpg
40 mph
Tyres
Automatic: adapted based on vehicle Inst. consumpt. 31.0 mpg
7.0
8
gal
lighting.
31.0 mpg
x
Always day design: black or coloured text 19,5 23 5 Eco 19:36
on light background.
Always night design: white or coloured
text on dark background. Graphical information display 3 Range
or colour information display 3, Range is calculated from current fuel tank
Selections are indicated by a o in front of trip computer 3 content and instantaneous consumption.
the menu item. The display shows average values.
The trip computers provide information on
Ignition logic 3 driving data, which is continually recorded After refuelling, the vehicle updates the
Adjustment, see Infotainment system and evaluated electronically. range automatically after a brief delay.
instructions.
The trip computer main menu (Main)
provides information about range,
average consumption 3 and current
consumption.
To display other trip computer data, press
the BC button on the infotainment
system 3, select the trip computer menu
front the display or press the left adjuster
wheel 3 on the steering wheel.
Distance travelled
Driven mileage display. The measurement
can be reset to zero and restarted at any
time, see "Resetting trip computer 2 Board Computer 19,5 19:36
information to zero". BC 1 All values
Average speed
BC 2
Range Average speed calculation. The 257.0
1
miles
measurement can be reset to zero and Timer
33miles
restarted at any time, see "Resetting trip 40 mph
Tyres
computer information to zero". 7.0
8
gal
OK Stoppages in the journey with the ignition 31.0 mpg

off are not included in the calculations.
Effective consumption
If the fuel in the tank will allow less than Used fuel quantity display. The Resetting trip computer information to
30 miles (50 km) of travel, the warning measurement can be reset to zero and zero (reset)
"Range" appears on the display. restarted at any time, see "Resetting trip The following trip computer information
computer information to zero". can be reset (restart measurements):
If less than 20 miles (30 km) can be driven
with the fuel remaining in the tank, the Average consumption z Distance
warning "Please refuel!" 3 appears on the Average consumption calculation. The z Average speed
display. measurement can be reset to zero and z Effective consumption
restarted at any time, see "Resetting trip z Average consumption.
Acknowledge the menu item as described computer information to zero".
on page 130. Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer
Instantaneous consumption menu.
Display changes depending on speed:
Display in gal/h Below 8 mph (13 km/h)
Display in mpg Above 8 mph (13 km/h)
Interruption of power supply

If the power supply has been interrupted or
if the battery voltage has dropped too low,
2 Reset BC 1 19,5 19:36 2 Reset BC 1 19,5 19:36 the values stored in the trip computer will
All values
be lost.
All values
257.0 miles 257.0 miles
40 mph 40 mph
7.0 gal 7.0 gal
31.0 mpg 31.0 mpg
The information of the two trip computers To reset all information of a trip computer,
can be reset separately, making it possible select menu item All values.
to evaluate data from different time After resetting, "- - -" is displayed for the
periods. trip computer information selected. The
Select the desired trip computer recalculated values are displayed after a
information. brief delay.
The value for the selected function will be
reset and recalculated.
The desired stop watch display can be

selected from the Options menu 3:
Driving Time excl. Stops
The time the vehicle is in motion is
2 Board Computer
BC 1 recorded. Stationary time is not included. BC 1
BC 2 00:00:00 Driving Time incl. Stops BC 2
Timer The time the vehicle is in motion is Timer
recorded. The time the vehicle is stationary
Tyres Start Tyres
with the key in the starter switch is
Reset included.
Options Travel Time
Measurement of the time from manual
activation via Start to manual deactivation
via Reset.
Stop watch Display of current tyre pressure 3
Select menu item Timer from the Board Select menu item Tyres from the Board
Computer menu. Computer menu.
The Timer menu is displayed. The current pressure of each tyre is
To start, select menu item Start. displayed.
To reset, select menu item Reset. Further information, see page 219.
Check control 3 Examples of warning messages for the

Check control monitors some fluid levels, graphical information display 3 and colour
the tyre pressure 3, battery of the remote information display 3 are depicted. On the
control, the anti-theft warning system 3, board information display, messages
the brake light switch and important appear in an abbreviated form.
exterior lights, including cable and fuses. In Acknowledge warning messages as
trailer mode, the trailer lighting is described on pages 125, 130. Coolant level
monitored. Unacknowledged warning messages can check
Warning messages appear on the display. be re-displayed later.
If there are several warning messages, they Warning messages:
are displayed one after the other.
Remote Control OK
Some of the warning messages appear on Battery
the display in an abbreviated form. check
Battery voltage of remote control or Brake light switch
electronic key in Open&Start system too check
low 3, see page 34. Fault. Brake light does not come on during
braking. Have the cause of the fault
eliminated immediately by a workshop.
Safeguard
check
Fault. System fault in Vauxhall alarm
system. Have the cause of the fault
If there is a fault in the vehicle lighting, the In vehicles with tyre pressure control Wash
respective fault source is displayed as text, system 3, if there is major loss of pressure Fluid Level
e.g.: in a tyre, the display indicates the tyre at check
Brake light fault, e.g.: Fluid level in windscreen wash system too
check right Attention! low. Topping up wash fluid, see page 305.
Rear left tyre Rear window wash system and headlight
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring pressure loss wash system 3 are deactivated if wash
system 3, if tyre pressure is too low, the (value in bar) fluid level is low.
display indicates which tyre to check, e.g.:
Stop immediately and check tyres and tyre
Tyre pressure pressures. Tyre pressure monitoring Coolant level
check rear system 3 see page 219. check
right Fluid level in engine cooling system is low.
(value in bar) Check coolant level immediately see
Check tyre pressure at next opportunity page 300.
using suitable gauge. Tyre pressure Interruption of power supply
monitoring system 3, see page 219. Stored warning messages appear on the
Checking tyre pressure, see page 337. display one after the other.
Warning buzzers Indicator and warning buzzers for Astra z Continuous warning buzzer during roof
When starting the engine or whilst TwinTop 3: operation if the anti-roll bars 3 have
driving: z Indicator buzzer upon completed been triggered.
z If the electronic key of the Open&Start opening or closing of the convertible z Continuous warning buzzer starting one
system 3 is not present or is not hardtop. minute before the end of the 9-minute
recognised. z Indicator buzzer upon completed raising stand-by time with the roof in an
z If seat belt 3 is not fastened. or lowering of the electric luggage intermediate position.
compartment loading aid. z Continuous warning buzzer starting one
z If a door or the tailgate is ajar when the
vehicle starts off. z Gong tone if the boot lid is not closed minute before the end of the 9-minute
during roof operation. stand-by time with the loading aid in a
z Once you have reached a certain raised position.
speed 3 if the handbrake is applied. z Gong tone if the boot lid is not fully
opening during operation of the luggage z Persistent warning buzzer when closing
z If a specified maximum speed 3 is compartment loading aid. the luggage compartment lid, if the
exceeded. lowering process of the electric load aid
z Gong tone during roof operation if
z With Easytronic 3 - if A, M or R is selected vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h). is not complete or has been interrupted.
while the engine is running and the
drivers door is opened but the footbrake z Gong tone when vehicle speed exceeds
is not depressed. 20 mph (30 km/h) if the roof is not fully
open or closed.
When the vehicle is parked and the
drivers door is opened: z Three gong tones during roof or loading
z When the key is in the starter switch 3. aid operation if the luggage
compartment blind is not attached.
z With parking lights or dipped beam on.
z Three gong tones during roof operation
z With Open&Start system 3 and if outside temperature is below 20 C,
automatic transmission if the selector vehicle battery voltage is too low or the
lever is not in P. system is overloaded.
z With Easytronic 3, if the handbrake is
not applied and no gear is engaged
when the engine is off
Windscreen wiper Adjustable timed interval wipe 3 Automatic wiping with rain sensor 3:
To activate, move stalk up lightly. Adjust wiper interval to a value between To activate, move stalk up lightly.
2 and 15 seconds: switch ignition on, move $ = Automatic wiping with rain sensor
= Off stalk downwards from position , wait for
$ = Timed interval wipe required interval time and move stalk to = Off
% = Slow interval wiping $. The rain sensor detects the amount of
& = Fast The interval time selected remains stored water on the screen and automatically
until it is next changed or until the ignition controls the wiper.
The stalk always moves back to starting is turned off.
position. Shift to next higher or lower level: Keep the rain sensor detection field clear
move stalk slightly. After turning on the ignition and setting the by activating the screen wash system.
stalk to $, the interval is set to 6 seconds.
Move stalk past resistance point and hold:
the windscreen wiper stages are run
through; an acoustic signal sounds at
position .
Move stalk down from position : Single
swipe.
To deactivate, push stalk forward lightly

again.
If the stalk is held forwards, the rear screen
wash system is activated.
Empty windscreen wash system and Rear screen wiper and wash system
headlight wash system 3 To activate, push stalk forward lightly.
To activate, pull stalk toward steering The rear screen wiper swipes in timed
wheel. interval mode.
The wiper swipes for a few strokes. At low
speeds, there is a single post-wash swipe.
The headlight wash system 3 is ready for
operation when the headlights are
switched on. Wash fluid is sprayed onto the
headlights once. Then the headlight wash
system is disabled for 2 minutes.
On vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep
the sensor area clean.
Lighting 143
Lighting Versions with daytime running lights 3:

Parking lights are on when the ignition is
switched on and the light switch is set to 7
or AUTO. Dipped beam is on when the
engine is running.
The daytime running lights switch off when
Exterior lights ....................................... 143
the ignition is switched off.
Main beam, headlight flash ............... 144
Automatic dipped beam activation Follow the regulations of the country in
3 ......................................................... 144 which you are driving when using daytime
Turn signal lights ................................. 144 running lights and fog lights 3.
Fog lights > 3 ..................................... 145 Driving abroad, see page 150.
Fog tail light r .................................... 145
Reverse lights ....................................... 145
Hazard warning lights......................... 146 Exterior lights
Headlight range adjustment ? .......... 146 Turn light switch:
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL) .. 147 7 = Off
Door-to-door light function3.............. 148
8 = Parking lights
Instrument illumination,
information display illumination ...... 148 9 = Dipped beam or main beam
Courtesy light ....................................... 148 In positions 8 and 9, the tail lights and
Battery discharge protection.............. 150 number plate lights are also on.
Light covers.......................................... 150 Control indicator 8, see page 116.
Headlights when driving abroad ....... 150
If the ignition is switched off with the
dipped beam or main beam on, the
parking lights illuminate.
144 Lighting
Main beam, headlight flash Automatic dipped beam Turn signal lights
To switch from dipped beam to main activation 3 To activate, move stalk up or down lightly.
beam, push stalk forward. Light switch to AUTO: Dipped beam Stalk up = Right turn signal lights
To switch back to dipped beam, push stalk switches itself on or off automatically when
Stalk down = Left turn signal lights
forward again or pull toward steering the engine is running, depending on the
wheel. external lighting conditions.
To activate the headlight flash, pull stalk The exterior lights switch off when the
toward steering wheel. Main beam is ignition is switched off.
engaged for the duration of activation. For reasons of safety, the light switch
The blue control indicator C is illuminated should always remain in the AUTO
when main beam or headlight flash is on. position.
Move light switch to 9 if visibility is poor
because of fog, for example.
Lighting 145
After operation, the turn signal stalk Fog tail light r

returns to its starting position. The fog tail light can only be switched on
If the stalk is moved past the resistance both the ignition and dipped beam/
point, the turn signal light remains on. parking lights are on.
When the steering wheel moves back On = Press >, > illuminates in
toward the straight-ahead position, the instrument panel
turn signal light is automatically
Off = Press > again or turn off
deactivated.
ignition or light off
Tap signal: Move stalk to resistance point
and release to activate three flashes from The vehicle fog tail light are deactivated
the turn signals when changing lanes or the when towing.
like.
Reverse lights
Move the stalk to the resistance point and
Come on when reverse gear is engaged
hold for the turn signals to flash longer.
Fog lights > 3 and ignition is switched on.
Switch the turn signal off manually by The fog lights can only be switched on
moving the stalk slightly. when both the ignition and lights are on.
On = Press >, > illuminates in
instrument panel
Off = Press > again or turn off
ignition or light off
146 Lighting
Vehicles without automatic level control

system
0 = Front seats occupied
1 = All seats occupied
2 = All seats occupied and luggage
compartment load
3 = Drivers seat occupied and luggage
compartment load
Vehicles with automatic level control

system
0 = Front seats occupied
1 = All seats occupied
Hazard warning lights Headlight range adjustment ? 1 = All seats occupied and luggage
To switch on, press button , to switch off, Manual headlight range adjustment 3 compartment load
press button again. With dipped beam switched on, adjust 2 = Drivers seat occupied and luggage
To aid location of the pushbutton, the red headlight range in four steps to suit vehicle compartment load
surface is illuminated when the ignition load. Turn wheel against resistance and
click it to the required position. Automatic headlight range adjustment 3
switched on. When the button is pressed,
On vehicles with Xenon headlights, the
its control indicator flashes in time with the Correct adjustment of the headlight range
range of the headlights is adjusted
hazard warning lights. reduces dazzle for other road users.
automatically based on vehicle load.
The hazard warning lights switch on Automatic level control system 3, see
automatically when the airbags are page 217.
triggered, and the central locking unlocks
all doors. Switch off hazard warning lights
with button .
Lighting 147
Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 Curve lighting Control indicator B for adaptive driving
(AFL) The Xenon light beam pivots based on lights
improves lighting in curves (curve lighting) steering wheel position and speed (from Flashing: Fault in system. System not ready
on vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlight approx. 6 mph/10 km/h). for operation.
system. The headlights shine at an angle of up to If the cornering light swivelling device fails,
15 to the right or left of the direction of the relevant dipped beam is switched off.
travel. The corresponding fog light is
Motorway lighting automatically switched on for reasons of
At higher speeds and continuous straight safety.
ahead travel, the dipped beam Contact a workshop for assistance.
automatically raises slightly, thereby
increasing headlight range. A flashing control indicator B for
4 seconds after the ignition is switched on
is a reminder that the headlights have
been adjusted, see "Headlights when
driving abroad", page 150.
148 Lighting
Door-to-door light function3 Instrument illumination, Courtesy light

Dipped beam and reverse lights 3 information display illumination Automatic interior light
illuminate for around 30 seconds after the Comes on when ignition is switched on. Comes on automatically when the vehicle is
driver exits the vehicle and closes his door. unlocked with the remote control, when a
Brightness can be adjusted when the
To activate door is opened or when the key is removed
exterior lights are on: Push to release
1. Switch off ignition. from the starter switch after the ignition is
knob k and then turn it clockwise or
switched off.
2. Remove ignition key 3. anti-clockwise and hold until the desired
brightness is obtained. Goes off automatically after a delay when
3. Open drivers door. the doors are closed or immediately when
Display mode 3, see page 134.
4. Pull turn signal stalk toward steering the ignition is switched on or the doors are
wheel. locked.
5. Close drivers door. Front courtesy light
To operate manually from inside when the
If the drivers door is left open, the lights will doors are closed:
go out after two minutes.
On = Press button c
The light is switched off immediately by
Off = Press button c again
inserting the key into the ignition or pulling
the turn signal stalk again with the drivers
door open.
Lighting 149
Entry lighting 3
After unlocking the vehicle, the instrument
and switch lighting come on for a few
seconds.
Door handle lighting 3
When the exterior lights are on, the interior
front door handles are illuminated.
Illuminated mirror in the sun visors 3
The lighting switches on when the cover is
opened.
Glove compartment lighting
on when lid is open.
Cigarette lighter and ashtray
Front reading lights 3 Courtesy lights and rear reading lights 3 illumination 3
Left and right reading lights are Centre switch position: The rear courtesy Comes on when ignition is switched on.
individually operable. With ignition on: light comes on together with the front one
Luggage compartment lighting
On = Press button a when a door is open.
Comes on when the boot lid/tailgate is
Off = Press button a again The rear reading lights on the left and right opened.
can be switched on separately. With
Automatically regulated centre console
ignition on:
lighting 3
On = Switch position I Spotlight in housing of interior mirror.
Off = Switch position 0 Daylight-dependent, automatically
regulated centre console lighting with
ignition switched on.
150 Lighting
Battery discharge protection Vehicles with adaptive forward lighting 3

To prevent the battery from becoming (AFL)
discharged, the courtesy light, reading 1. Pull and hold stalk for main beam on
lights, luggage compartment lighting and steering wheel (headlight flash)
glove compartment lighting switch off 2. Switch on ignition.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition
3. After approx. 3 seconds, an acoustic
is switched off.
signal sounds and then AFL control
indicator B flashes approx. 4 seconds.
Light covers
The inside of the light covers may mist up After the switch, AFL control indicator B
briefly in poor, wet and cold weather flashes for 4 seconds each time the ignition
conditions, in heavy rain or after washing. is switched on.
The mist disappears quickly by itself; to To return to asymmetrical dipped beam,
help, switch on the lights. pull and hold the main beam stalk again,
switch on the ignition and wait for the
Headlights when driving abroad acoustic signal. AFL control indicator B
The asymmetrical dipped beam increases will then discontinue flashing.
the field of vision on the passenger side of Control indicator B, see pages 118, 147.
the lane.
This causes glare for oncoming traffic if the
vehicle is driven in countries where traffic
drives on the opposite side of the road.
Do as follows to prevent glare:
Vehicles with halogen headlight system
or Xenon headlight system 3
Have headlights adjusted in a workshop.
Infotainment system 151
Infotainment system Radio reception 3

Car radio reception differs from domestic
radio reception:
As the vehicle antenna is relatively near the
ground, the broadcasting companies
cannot guarantee the same quality of
reception as obtained with a domestic
radio using an overhead antenna.
z Changes in distance from the
transmitter,
z multi-path reception due to reflection
and
z shadowing
may cause hissing, noise, distortion or loss
of reception altogether. Remote control on steering
Radio reception 3................................ 151 wheel 3
Infotainment system 3........................ 151 Infotainment system 3 The functions of the Infotainment system 3
Remote control on steering wheel 3 .. 151 The infotainment system is operated as and the information display can be
Twin Audio 3 ....................................... 152 described in the operating instructions. operated using the adjuster wheels and
AUX input 3......................................... 152 buttons on the steering wheel.
Mobile telephones and radio Further information see pages 125, 131
equipment 3...................................... 152 and the relevant operating instructions.
152 Infotainment system
Mobile telephones and radio

equipment 3
The Vauxhall installation instructions and
the operating guidelines provided by the
telephone manufacturer must be observed
when fitting and operating a mobile
telephone. Failure to do so could invalidate
the vehicles operating permit
(EU Directive 95/54/EG).
Recommended prerequisites for fault-free
operation:
z Professionally installed exterior antenna
to obtain the maximum range possible.
z Maximum transmission power 10 Watt.
Twin Audio 3 AUX input 3
Twin Audio allows rear seat occupants the The AUX input is in the centre console next z Installation of the telephone in a suitable
choice between the audio source played on to the handbrake. spot (see information on page 106).
the Infotainment system 3 or another An external audio source such as portable
audio source. CD player can be connected using a
Only an audio source that is not currently 3.5 mm jack plug via the AUX input.
active on the infotainment system can be Keep AUX input clean and dry at all times.
controlled using Twin Audio.
Two headphone connections are available, infotainment system operating
with separate volume controls. instructions.
infotainment system operating
instructions.
Infotainment system 153
Obtain advice on predetermined For reasons of safety, we recommend that

installation locations for the external you do not use the phone while driving.
antenna and equipment holder and ways Even use of a hands-free set can be a
of using devices with transmission power of distraction while driving. Be sure to observe
more than 10 Watts. We recommend that any country-specific regulations.
you consult your Vauxhall Authorised
repairer, who will have brackets and 9 Warning
various installation kits available as
accessories and will install them in Mobile phones and radio equipment may
accordance with regulations. cause malfunctions in the vehicle
electronics if they are operated in the
A hands-free attachment without an
vehicle without the external antenna
external antenna in mobile phone
unless the above-mentioned regulations
standards GSM 900/1800/1900 and UMTS
are complied with.
must only be operated if the maximum
transmission power of the mobile phone Mobile phones that do not comply with
does not exceed 2 Watts with GSM 900 the above-mentioned mobile phone
and 1 Watt in other cases. The operating standard and radio equipment must only
regulations stipulated by the manufacturer be operated using an antenna that is
of the telephone and the hands-free attached to the exterior of the vehicle.
attachment must be complied with.
154 Climate control
Climate control
Heating and ventilation system,

air conditioning system 3................. 154
Automatic air conditioning system 3 155
Electronic climate control system 3 ... 155
Air vents ............................................... 156
Cooled glove compartment 3 ............ 156
Heated rear window 3,
heated exterior mirrors 3 ................. 157
Heated front seats 3........................... 157 Heating and ventilation system, The buttons for cooling n and air
Heating and ventilation system ......... 158 air conditioning system 3 recirculation 4 are only found on
Air conditioning system 3................... 161 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 are versions with optional air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning system 3 163 combined into one unit that is designed to system 3.
Electronic climate control system 3 ... 168 provide comfort regardless of the season, Air conditioning system 3 -
Air intake .............................................. 174 weather or outside temperature. see pages 161, 163.
Pollen filter ........................................... 174 When cooling 3 is activated, the air is
Note ...................................................... 174 cooled and dried.
Maintenance ........................................ 175 The heating unit heats the air as required in
all operating modes depending on the
position of the temperature switch. The air
supply can be adjusted to suit
requirements by means of the fan.
Climate control 155
The set values appear on the information

display.
Electronic climate control system, see
page 168.
Automatic air conditioning Electronic climate control

system 3 system 3
Provides a comfortable interior regardless Offers the greatest comfort in the vehicle
of the weather, outside temperature or interior regardless of the conditions
season. outside.
When an interior temperature is set with To ensure a uniform and comfortable
the temperature control, the temperature climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
and amount of inflowing air are inflowing air, air-flow rate and air
automatically regulated. A uniform, distribution are automatically adapted
comfortable climate in the vehicle is based on the climate conditions outside
thereby automatically obtained based on the vehicle and the current temperature of
outside climate conditions. the vehicle interior.
Automatic air conditioning system -
see page 163.
156 Climate control
Air vents To close the vent, turn the vertical adjuster Cooled glove compartment 3
The interior ventilation can be adjusted to wheel fully up. The symbol 0 appears. The Cooled air is fed into the glove
a comfortable level by adjusting the slats of the vent remain open although the compartment through a nozzle.
temperature switch. air supply is closed.
If glove compartment cooling is not
To increase the air supply, turn the fan all Windscreen defroster nozzles (2) required, slide the slider forward.
the way up and set the air distribution Air distribution switch to l or J: Air flows
switch to M or L. onto windscreen and side windows.
Centre and side air vents (1) Additional vents
Open nozzle: move vertical knurled wheel below the windscreen and door windows
downwards. and in the front footwell.
Adjust air flow direction by rotating the
horizontal knurled wheel.
Climate control 157
Heating takes place with the engine

running and is switched off automatically
after several minutes.
Astra TwinTop: The headed rear window
and heated exterior mirrors 3 are
deactivated when the roof is open.
The heated rear window automatically
switches on when the diesel particle filter is
being cleaned 3 depending on the engine.
Heated rear window 3, Heated front seats 3

heated exterior mirrors 3 Two buttons above the centre air vents for
With the ignition on, the rear screen and left and right seat.
exterior mirror heating is switched on by Operation with ignition switched on:
pressing button :
Press button one or more times to set the
LED in button illuminated: rear window desired heat output. The control indicator
and exterior mirror heating. in the button indicates which of the three
LED in button not illuminated: rear heating levels is active.
window and exterior mirror heating is We do not recommend prolonged use of
switched off. the highest level for people with sensitive
skin.
To switch off: Press button repeatedly
until the control indicator in the button
goes out.
Seat heating is operational when the
engine is running.
158 Climate control
Heating and ventilation system Temperature Air flow

Air distribution Adjust with centre rotary switch. Adjust with right rotary switch.
Adjust with left rotary switch. Red area = Warm Four fan speeds:
L To head area via adjustable vents, Blue area = Cold x Switched off
to footwell 1-4 Selected fan speed
M To head area via adjustable vents
The rate of air flow is determined by the
l To windscreen and front door fan. The fan should therefore also be
windows switched on during a journey.
J To windscreen and front door
windows, to footwell
K To footwell
Intermediate settings are possible.
Open the air vents when the switch is set
to L or M.
Climate control 159
Heating The comfort and general well-being of the

The amount of heat is dependent on the vehicle occupants are to a large extent
coolant temperature and is thus not fully dependent on a suitable ventilation and
attained until the engine is warm. heating setting.
For rapid warming of the passenger To achieve a stratification of temperature
compartment: with the pleasant effect of "cool head and
z Set air distribution switch to desired warm feet", turn the rotary switch for air
position, preferably position J, see distribution to K or J, set temperature
page 158. rotary switch to any position (in the mid-
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as range with stratification of temperature).
far as it will go (warm).
z Set the fan to speed 3.
z Open air vents.
Ventilation
Vehicles with Quickheat 3: depending on
z For maximum ventilation in head area:
the outside temperature and the engine
set air distribution switch to M and open
temperature the passenger compartment
all vents.
is heated up more quickly using an
z For ventilation to footwell: Set air auxiliary electric heater.
distribution switch to K.
The auxiliary electric heater switches itself
z For simultaneous ventilation to the head on automatically.
area and the footwell: set air distribution
switch to L.
z Set the temperature to the desired
setting.
z Switch fan on, adjust as required.
160 Climate control
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise as

far as it will go (warm).
z Set fan switch to 3 or 4.
z Activate heated rear window .
z Open side air vents as required and
direct them towards the side windows.
Heating the footwell Window demisting and de-icing

z Set air distribution switch to K.
z Move temperature switch to red zone.
9 Warning
z Switch on fan. Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp

weather, damp clothing or low outside
temperatures:
z Move air distribution switch to l.
z For simultaneous footwell heating, set
air distribution switch to J.
Climate control 161
Air conditioning system 3

As a supplement to the heating and
ventilation system, the air conditioning
system cools and dehumidifies (dries)
inflowing air.
If cooling or dehumidification is not
desired, switch off cooling in order to save
fuel.
Cooling switches off automatically at low
outside temperatures.
Cooling n Air recirculation system 4

Operate only with the engine on and the The recirculation switch 4 is used to set
fan running: the ventilation system to recirculation
On = Press n mode (control indicator in switch).
Off = Press n again If fumes or unpleasant odours penetrate
Control indicator in the button. from outside: temporarily switch on air
recirculation system 4.
To increase the cooling power at high
outside temperatures, temporarily switch
on the air recirculation system.
162 Climate control
The air recirculation system minimises the

entry of outside air. The humidity
increases, and the windows can mist up.
The quality of the passenger compartment
air deteriorates which may cause the
vehicle occupants to feel drowsy.
Air distribution to l: the air recirculation
system is automatically switched off to
speed up window demisting and prevent
fogging.
Comfort setting Maximum cooling

z Set cooling n as desired. Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so
z Air recirculation system 4 off. that warm air can escape rapidly.
z Set air distribution switch to M or L. z Cooling n on.
z Set temperature switch as desired. z Air recirculation system 4 on.
z Switch on fan at desired speed. z Set air distribution switch to M.
z Open or adjust air vents as required. z Turn the temperature switch

anti-clockwise as far as it will go (cold).
Temperature switch in centre of
adjustment range: warmer air will flow into z Set fan switch to 4.
the footwell and cooler air into the upper z Open all air vents.
zone, with warmer air coming from the side
air vents and cooler air from the centre
vents.
Climate control 163
z Cooling n on, the AC compressor Automatic air conditioning

switches off automatically at low exterior system 3
temperatures (icing). Provides a uniformly comfortable interior
z Move air distribution switch to l. regardless of the weather, outside
z Turn the temperature switch clockwise. temperature or season.
z Set fan switch to 4. To ensure a constant and comfortable

climate in the vehicle, the temperature of
z Open side air vents as required and the inflowing air and the air-flow rate are
direct them towards door windows. changed automatically based on climate
z Switch on heated rear window . conditions outside the vehicle.
Temperature changes due to external
influences, such as direct sunlight, are
automatically compensated.
Window demisting and de-icing
9 Warning
Failure to follow the instructions could
lead to misted or icy windows and
accidents stemming from impaired
visibility.
Misted or icy windows, e.g. due to damp

temperatures:
164 Climate control
Automatic mode Air distribution Temperature preset

Basic setting for maximum comfort: Adjust with left rotary switch. Adjust with centre rotary switch.
z Set fan switch to A L To head area via adjustable vents, Set the rotary switch to a value between
to footwell 17 C and 27 C. Intermediate settings are
z Set air distribution switch to desired M To head area via adjustable vents
position - see next column possible.
l To windscreen and front door
z Use rotary switch to set temperature The selected temperature is maintained.
windows
to 22 C (a higher or lower temperature J To windscreen and front door For reasons of comfort, temperature can
can be set as desired) windows, to footwell only be changed in small increments.
z Air conditioning compressor activation, K To footwell There is no temperature control for settings
see page 165 Intermediate settings are possible. below 17 C (all the way left) or above
z open all air vents. 27 C (all the way right). The air
Open the air vents when the switch is set conditioning system works at maximum
Deactivation of the air conditioning to L or M. cooling or heating.
compressor can reduce the level of comfort
and safety - see page 165.
Climate control 165
Air flow To activate/deactivate air conditioning Manual air recirculation mode

Adjust with right rotary switch. compressor (cooling) n The air recirculation system prevents the
1 - 4 Manual fan speed setting, Operate only with the engine on and the entry of outside air and the air in the
intermediate settings are possible fan running: passenger compartment is circulated.
A Automatic fan speed setting On = Press n Press button 4, control indicator in
x Fan switched off Off = Press n again button.
Fan speed is regulated to provide the rate Control indicator in the button. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
of air flow necessary to maintain the pre- When cooling (AC compressor) is active, air recirculation mode. The quality of the
selected temperature. is cooled and dehumidified. If cooling or passenger compartment air deteriorates
Select automatic mode for the highest level dehumidification is not desired, switch off which may cause the vehicle occupants to
of comfort. cooling in order to save fuel. feel drowsy. In operation without cooling
the air humidity increases, so the windows
When the fan is off, the air conditioning Cooling switches off automatically at low may mist up. Consequently, manual air
compressor is also off. outside temperatures. recirculation should only be run for short
periods of time.
To deactivate manual air recirculation:
Press button 4 again. The control
indicator in the button will go out.
166 Climate control
Heating Vehicles with Quickheat 3: depending on

The amount of heat is dependent on the the outside temperature and the engine
coolant temperature and is thus not fully temperature the passenger compartment
attained until the engine is warm. is heated up more quickly using an
For rapid warming of the passenger auxiliary electric heater.
compartment: The auxiliary electric heater switches itself
z Set the air distribution switch to the on automatically.
desired position, see page 158. The comfort and general well-being of the
z Set the centre rotary switch to the vehicle occupants are to a large extent
desired temperature. We recommend a dependent on a suitable ventilation and
value of about 22 C. heating setting.
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be To obtain a stratification of temperature in
manually set: Set the rotary switch to the vehicle with the pleasant effect "cool
Ventilation position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are head and warm feet", set the air
z For maximum ventilation in head area: also possible. distribution switch to K or J, set the
set air distribution switch to M and open temperature switch to about 22 C and
all vents. open the centre air vents.
z For ventilation to footwell: Set air
distribution switch to K.
z For simultaneous ventilation to the head
area and the footwell: set air distribution
switch to L.
z Set desired temperature.
z Set fan switch to A. The fan can also be
manually set: Set the rotary switch to
position 1 - 4. Intermediate settings are
also possible.
Climate control 167
z Set temperature to maximum heating,

i.e. turn the centre rotary switch all the
way to the right (28 C).
z Switch on heated rear window .
Operation with cooling (air conditioning
compressor) is not possible when outside
temperatures are low.
To switch off, press button V again; the
automatic air conditioning system will
operate at the settings selected previously.
Maximum cooling for very hot interior Window demisting and de-icing
Open windows and sunroof 3 briefly so
that warm air can escape rapidly. 9 Warning
z Cooling n on.
Failure to follow the instructions could
z Set air distribution switch to M. lead to misted or icy windows and
z Set the temperature switch to the desired accidents stemming from impaired
temperature. visibility.
z Set fan switch to A. Misted or icy windows, e. g. due to damp
z Open all air vents. weather, damp clothing or low outside
temperatures:
The automatic climate control system
provides maximum cooling down to the set z Cooling n on.
value. z Press button V: In switch position A, the
At settings below 17 C (rotary switch all fan automatically switches to the highest
the way to the left), the system continually speed and air is directed to the
runs with maximum cooling. When the air windscreen.
conditioning compressor is running, air
recirculation is switched on automatically.
168 Climate control
Electronic climate control

system 3
Provides a the greatest amount of comfort
in the interior regardless of the weather, FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3
outside temperature or season.
To ensure a constant and comfortable
climate in the vehicle, the temperature of 90.6 MHz
the inflowing air, the air-flow rate and the
air distribution are changed automatically
according to climatic conditions outside
the vehicle.
Temperature changes due to external
influences, such as direct sunlight, are
automatically compensated. Different settings are stored for each The automatic air recirculation system 3
Data is shown on the information display. remote control. Use of a remote control will has an air quality sensor to detect harmful
Setting modifications are briefly shown in activate the settings associated with it. ambient gases, in which case it will switch
the information display, superimposing Manual settings e.g. operating without automatically to recirculation.
over the currently displayed menu. cooling and air distribution can be selected When set to automatic mode, the climate
The display can vary according to the type using the menu, see page 170. control system provides the optimal
of presentation, see page 122. When cooling (air conditioning settings for almost all conditions. If
compressor) is active, air is cooled and necessary, climate control system settings
The settings in the climate control system
dehumidified. can be modified manually.
are stored in the vehicle key when the
vehicle is locked, see "Store personal The pollen filter removes dust, soot, pollen The climate control system is only
settings in vehicle key", see page 32. and spores from the inflowing outside air. operational when the engine is running.
Cooling (air conditioning compressor)
switches off automatically at low outside
temperatures.
Climate control 169
Switching off the AC compressor Automatic air recirculation mode 3

(Eco appears in display) can reduce The ventilation system is set to recirculation
comfort and affect safety, see page 171. mode and interior air is recirculated.
All air vents are actuated automatically in The automatic air recirculation system has
automatic mode. The air vents should an air quality sensor to detect harmful
therefore always be open, see page 156. gases in the outside air, in which case it will
switch automatically to recirculation.
If outside temperatures are low and
cooling (air conditioning compressor) is
switched off, automatic air recirculation is
only available in a limited capacity so as to
prevent the windows from misting. Activate
recirculation manually if so desired.
Automatic mode Switching automatic recirculation on or off,
Basic setting for maximum comfort: see page 173.
z Press AUTO button. Manual recirculation mode, see page 173.
z Open all air vents.
z Air conditioning compressor activation,
see page 171.
z Preset temperature to 22 C using left
rotary switch.
The temperature can be set higher or lower
as desired.
170 Climate control
Temperature preset Climate Air distribut.

The left rotary switch can be used to set
Air distribut.
temperatures between 16 C and 28 C.
AC
For reasons of comfort, temperature can Autom. blower
only be changed in small increments. Auto. recirc
Vehicles with Quickheat 3: depending on
the outside temperature and the engine
temperature the passenger compartment
is heated up more quickly using an
auxiliary electric heater.
The auxiliary electric heater switches itself
on automatically.
If a temperature below 16 C is set,
Lo appears in the display: the climate Manual settings Individual menu items are marked by
control system runs constantly at Under certain circumstances (e.g. iced or turning the centre switch and selected by
maximum cooling power. The temperature misted windows), the functions of the pressing it. Selecting certain menus by
is not regulated. climate control system can be modified pressing the rotary switch will open a
manually. submenu 3.
If a temperature above 28 C is set,
Hi appears in the display: the climate Climate control system settings can be To exit a menu, turn the centre switch left
control system runs constantly at changed via the centre switch, the buttons or right to Return or Main and select.
maximum heating power. The temperature and the menus depicted on the display. Manual settings are saved when the
is not regulated. Press the centre switch to call up the menu. ignition is switched off.
The temperature settings are saved when The menu for manual climate control
the ignition is switched off. system settings appears in the display.
Climate control 171
The air flow can be increased or decreased

FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3 Climate
by turning the right switch.
Air distribut.
To return to automatic mode: press AC Air conditioning
90.6 MHz button V or AUTO. Autom. blower on / off
Heated rear window, see page 157. Auto. recirc
Window demisting and de-icing Activating and deactivating air

conditioning compressor
9 Warning If no cooling or dehumidification is
required, switch the air conditioning
Failure to follow the instructions could compressor off (maximum energy savings):
lead to misted or icy windows and Mark menu item AC from the manual
accidents stemming from impaired settings menu and select by pressing.
visibility. Eco appears on the display.
Inflowing air is neither cooled nor
Misted or icy windows, e.g. due to damp
dehumidified. This restricts the level of
comfort provided by the electronic climate
temperatures:
control system. This may cause the
Press V button, V appears in display: windows to mist up, for example.
control indicator in button illuminates.
To activate cooling: Select menu item AC
The temperature and the air distribution from the manual settings menu and press
are adjusted automatically, the fan runs at to activate cooling.
a faster speed and the windows are rapidly
cleared of ice and moisture.
172 Climate control
Air distribut. FM AS [TP] REG CDin MP3 Automatic blower
Strong
90.6 MHz Normal
Weak
Air distribution Air flow Fan control in automatic mode 3

Press the centre switch. The possible air Turn right switch right or left. The selected Fan regulation in automatic mode can be
distribution settings appear one after fan speed in indicated with x and the modified.
another in the display. number in the display. Select menu item Automatic blower from
Air distribution can also be set in the Air At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air the manual settings menu and select the
distribut. menu: conditioning compressor) are switched off. desired fan control.
Up Air distribution to windscreen and To return to automatic mode: Press AUTO Depending on the setting, the maximum
front door windows. button. air flow, and thereby the noise level, will
Centre Air distribution to vehicle increase.
occupants via front adjustable
vents.
Down Air distribution to footwell.
Return to automatic air distribution:
Deactivate corresponding setting or press
button AUTO.
Climate control 173
Climate
Air distribut.
AC Automatic
Autom. blower recirculation
Residual air conditioning on
Auto. recirc air control at
bad outside air
Switching automatic recirculation 3 on Manual air recirculation mode Air conditioning with the engine not
or off The air recirculation system prevents the running
The automatic air recirculation system has entry of outside air and the air in the When the vehicle is stopped and the
an air quality sensor to detect harmful passenger compartment is circulated. ignition off, the heat or cooling power still
gases in the outside air, in which case it will Press button 4, the control indicator in in the system can be used to condition the
switch automatically to recirculation. the button will illuminate. passenger compartment, for example
Select menu item Auto. recirc from the when stopped at a level crossing.
The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air
manual settings menu and switch it on or recirculation mode. The quality of the Press button AUTO with the ignition off.
off by pressing. passenger compartment air deteriorates Residual air conditioning on will appear
Switch to manual air recirculation as which may cause the vehicle occupants to briefly in the display.
necessary. feel drowsy. In operation without cooling The air conditioning will operate for a
the air humidity increases, so the windows limited period of time.
may mist up. Consequently, manual air To cancel air conditioning, press the AUTO
recirculation should only be run for short button.
periods of time.
To deactivate manual air recirculation:
Press button 4 again. The control
indicator in the button will go out.
174 Climate control
Pollen filter Note

The pollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen If the windscreen mists up during damp
and spores from the air entering from weather, set the system as described under
outside. The active carbon layer 3 "Demisting and defrosting the windows"
eliminates most odours and harmful for a short time, see pages 160, 163, 171.
ambient gases from the air. Cooling 3 operates most effectively with
Have pollen filter replaced by a workshop the window and the sunroof 3 closed. If the
in accordance with the intervals specified interior has become extremely hot after a
in the Service Booklet. long period of exposure to the sun, open
window and sunroof 3 for a short time so
that the hot air can escape.
When cooling 3 (air conditioning
compressor) is switched on condensation
forms, which is expelled from the underside
Air intake of the vehicle.
The air intakes in front of the windscreen in
the engine compartment must be kept
clear to allow air intake. Remove any
leaves, dirt or snow.
Climate control 175
At least one air vent must be open while Maintenance

cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is In order to ensure continuously efficient
on in order to prevent the evaporator from performance, the air conditioning
icing up due to lack of air movement. compressor 3 must be operated for a few
Cooling switches off automatically at low minutes once a month, irrespective of the
outside temperatures. weather and time of year. The climate
control system, if present, handles this
Do not cover the sensor on the instrument
automatically while driving. Air
panel as this could cause the climate
conditioning compressor operation is not
control 3 system to malfunction.
possible when outside temperatures are
low.
In the event of a fault, contact a workshop
for assistance.
176 Driving and operation
Driving and operation Easytronic 3

The semi-automatic Easytronic
transmission permits manual (manual
mode) or automatic gear shifting
(automatic mode), both with automatic
clutch control.
9 Warning
Disregard of these instructions may lead
to injuries or endanger life.
Transmission display
Easytronic 3 ......................................... 176 Shows the mode and current gear.
Automatic transmission 3 .................. 184 The display flashes for a few seconds when
Automatic transmission with A, M or R is selected with the engine
ActiveSelect 3 ................................... 190 running and the footbrake not activated.
Driving hints ......................................... 198
Saving fuel, protecting the
environment ...................................... 200
Fuels, refuelling.................................... 202
Catalytic converter, exhaust gases.... 204
Drive Control Systems ......................... 209
Brake system........................................ 222
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)........ 224
Wheels, tyres ........................................ 225
Roof racks 3......................................... 232
Towing equipment 3........................... 233
Caravan/trailer towing ........................ 237
Driving and operation 177
There is no need to select neutral before

starting the engine. If a gear is engaged,
the transmission automatically switches to
neutral (N) before the engine starts when
the footbrake is operated. This can lead to
a slight delay in the starting process.
Starting the engine

Easytronic operation via the selector lever
Operate footbrake when starting the
Always move the selector lever in the
engine. The engine can only be started
appropriate direction as far as it will go.
with the footbrake operated. "N" appears
Upon release, it automatically returns to
in the transmission display. If the footbrake
the centre position. Pay heed to the
is not operated the control indicator j 3
gear/mode indicator in the transmission
illuminates in the instrument panel, and
display.
"N" flashes in the transmission display - the
engine cannot be started. Move selector lever toward N
Neutral.
Also the vehicle cannot be started if all
brake lights have failed.
It is also possible to start off without

depressing the footbrake if the accelerator
pedal is operated directly after movement
of the selector lever. If there is no
immediate acceleration or the footbrake is
not depressed, no gear is engaged and "A"
flashes. After a few seconds, the display
resumes showing "N". Start off by
repeating the previously described
procedure.
In Automatic mode, selection of other
gears is automatic irrespective of driving
conditions.
Move selector lever toward A
Starting off Switch between Automatic and Manual Move selector lever toward + or -
Depress the footbrake, release the mode. + Shift to a higher gear
handbrake and move the selector lever
Manual gear shifting is possible in manual - Shift to a lower gear
to A, + or -. Easytronic is in automatic
mode and first gear is engaged (second mode. "M" and the currently engaged gear If a higher gear is selected when the
gear if the Winter programme is active). appear in the transmission display. running speed is too low, or a lower gear
"A1" appears in the transmission display If the engine speed is too low the Easytronic when the speed is too high, no shift is
("A2" if the Winter programme is active). will automatically shift to a lower gear even effected. This prevents the engine from
in Manual mode. This prevents the engine running at too low or too high revs.
The vehicle begins to "creep" when the
footbrake is released. from stalling. Gears can be skipped by moving the
selector lever repeatedly at short intervals.
If the vehicle is in automatic mode, on Electronically controlled driving

movement of the selector lever to + or - programmes
Easytronic shifts to manual mode and z By means of delayed gear changing
changes up or down. "M" and the currently (higher engine speeds) following a cold
engaged gear appear in the transmission start, the operating temperature
display. programme in automatic mode quickly
Move selector lever toward R and automatically brings the catalytic
Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is converter to the temperature required
stationary. for optimum pollutant reduction.
Depress the footbrake, release the z Adaptive programmes automatically

handbrake and move the selector lever to adapt gear shifting in automatic mode
R. Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appears in to suit the driving conditions, such as if
the transmission display. the vehicle is towing a caravan/trailer,
has a high payload, or is being driven on
The vehicle begins to "creep" when the inclines. z When SPORT mode is engaged, shift
footbrake is released. times are reduced and the transmission
It is also possible to start off in reverse shifts at higher engine speeds (unless
without depressing the footbrake if the cruise control is on). SPORT mode, see
accelerator pedal is operated directly after page 212.
movement of the selector lever. If there is z Winter programme: Press button T, see
no immediate acceleration or the next page.
footbrake is not depressed, no gear is
engaged and "R" flashes. After a few
seconds, the display resumes showing "N".
Start off by repeating the previously
described procedure.
If the Winter programme is activated,

SPORT mode is deactivated.
If the vehicle is switched to manual mode
while the winter programme is active, the
winter programme is interrupted. The
winter programme resumes upon return to
automatic mode.
Winter programme T Kickdown

In the event of difficulties starting off Accelerator pedal pressed past the
on slippery roads, press button T pressure point: below certain speeds, the
("A", currently engaged gear and T transmission shifts down into a lower gear.
appear in the transmission display). Full engine power is available for
Easytronic switches to automatic mode acceleration.
and the vehicle sets off in second gear. During kickdown no manual gear shifting is
The winter program is switched off by: possible.
z pressing button T again,
z turning off the ignition.
In order to protect the Easytronic the winter
programme automatically switches itself
off at extremely high clutch temperatures.
When the engine speed approaches its "Rocking the car"

upper limit, the transmission shifts to a If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
higher gear during kickdown even in to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,
Manual mode. move the selector lever between R and A
Without kickdown this automatic shift is (or + or -) in a repeat pattern while applying
not effected in Manual mode. light pressure to the accelerator pedal. Do
not race the engine and avoid sudden
If SPORT mode is engaged, the drive acceleration.
wheels may spin slightly when starting off
with kickdown. This allows for maximum This applies only to the exceptional
acceleration of the vehicle. circumstances mentioned above.
Engine braking
Automatic mode:
When driving downhill, Easytronic does not
shift into higher gears until a fairly high Manoeuvring the vehicle
engine speed has been reached. When To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth
braking, Easytronic shifts down in good during attempts to park or in garage
time. entrances the creeping movement can be
Manual mode: utilised by releasing the footbrake.
To utilise the engine braking effect, select a Never actuate accelerator and brake
lower gear in good time when driving pedals simultaneously.
downhill.
To prevent damage, Easytronic
disengages the "creep function" when the
temperature of the automatic clutch is
high.
Stopping the vehicle Vehicle storage

In Automatic or Manual mode, when the Before leaving the vehicle:
vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter z Engage handbrake.
mode engaged, second gear) is engaged z Remove the ignition key or, with the
automatically and the clutch released. In R Open&Start system 3, remove the
reverse remains engaged. electronic key from the vehicle.
A warning buzzer sounds when the drivers The most recently engaged gear (indicator
door is opened if the engine is running, a in transmission display) remains engaged.
gear is engaged and the footbrake is not With N, no gear is engaged.
depressed. The vehicle creeps if the When the ignition is switched off the
handbrake is not engaged. Move the Easytronic no longer responds to
selector lever to N and apply the movement of the selector lever.
handbrake.
Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the battery
When stopping on gradients, engage the may become discharged if the vehicle is
handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To Fault
parked for long periods. Control indicator A illuminates in the
prevent overheating of the clutch, do not
increase engine speed to ensure smooth If the handbrake has not been applied, the event of a fault in the Easytronic system. In
idling when in gear. control indicator R flashes for a few the event of serious faults, "F" also appears
seconds after the ignition is switched off. in the transmission display.
To prevent damage to the Easytronic, the
clutch is closed automatically at high With the engine off and the handbrake not It is possible to continue driving if only
clutch temperatures. applied, when the drivers door is opened a control indicator A illuminates. Manual
warning buzzer sounds and the control mode can then no longer be selected.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy indicator R flashes; switch on ignition,
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level If "F" appears in the transmission display,
engage gear, switch off ignition and apply continued driving is not possible.
crossings. handbrake.
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a
workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated
into the system facilitates rapid fault
identification.
If the cause of the power failure is not a 3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see
discharged battery, contact a workshop. If figure) so that no dirt can get into the
the vehicle must be removed from flowing opening when the cap is removed.
traffic, release the clutch on vehicles with 4. Rotate cap to slacken and remove by
5-speed Easytronic. On vehicles with lifting upwards, see figure.
6-speed Easytronic, the clutch cannot be
released 3; if the vehicle must be moved, 5. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise using
raise vehicle at the front to tow. a flat-head screwdriver (vehicle tools 3,
see page 251) until clear resistance can
To disengage the clutch (only on vehicles be felt. The clutch has now been
with 5-speed Easytronic) disengaged.
1. Apply handbrake and switch off ignition.
Do not turn beyond the resistance, since
2. Prop bonnet open, see page 241. this can damage the Easytronic.
6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must be
Interruption of power supply in full contact with the housing.
The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle
Towing the vehicle and starting the engine
battery is discharged and a gear has been
is not permitted when the clutch has been
selected. The vehicle cannot move.
released in this way, although the vehicle
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using can be moved a short distance.
jump leads, see page 243.
Contact a workshop immediately for
assistance.
Automatic transmission 3
The automatic transmission 3 allows
automatic selection.
The engine can only be started when the
gear selector is in position P or N. When
starting in position N, depress the
footbrake or apply the handbrake. After
starting the engine, depress the brake
before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate
whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been
selected and the brake is released, the
vehicle will "creep". Never operate the
accelerator and the brake pedal
simultaneously. The selected gear is
displayed in the transmission display. Transmission display Selector lever positions P, R, N and D
Display of mode or selected gear in left P Park position. Front wheels locked.
9 Warning position of transmission display. The gear Only engage when the vehicle is
that has been selected by the transmission stationary and the handbrake is
Disregard of these instructions may lead appears in the right position of the applied. "P" appears on the
to injuries or endanger life. transmission display. transmission display.
P Park position R Reverse gear. Only engage when the
Only select 3, 2 or 1 to prevent automatic R Reverse gear vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on
upshifting or as an aid in engine braking. the transmission display.
N Neutral
N Neutral or idle. "N" appears on the
D Drive position transmission display.
3, 2, 1 Selected gear 3 D Drive position for normal driving in
1st gear to highest gear. "D" and the
current gear appear in the
transmission display.
The selector lever can only be moved from Gears 3, 2, 1

P when the ignition is switched on and the 3, 2, 1 Transmission does not shift above
footbrake depressed (selector lever lock). the selected gear
To engage P or R, push button on selector
Press button on selector lever to engage 3
lever.
or 1.
The engine can only be started with lever in
The current gear is displayed in the
position P or N. When position N is selected,
press footbrake or engage handbrake
before starting.
Do not accelerate during the selection
procedure.
Electronically controlled driving

programmes
z When SPORT mode is engaged, the
transmission shifts at higher engine revs
(unless cruise control is on). Control
indicator 1 illuminates in the
transmission display, see page 184.
SPORT mode, see page 212.
z Winter programme: Press button T, see
next page.
z Automatic neutral shift function z The operating temperature programme

automatically sets the transmission to N automatically brings the catalytic
to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at converter to the temperature that is
traffic lights. required for optimum emission reduction
Automatic neutral is activated when the after a cold start by selecting an
following occur simultaneously: appropriate gear (increased engine
revs).
The selector lever is in automatic
mode 3, z The adaptive programme automatically
tailors gearshifting to the driving
The selector lever is in position 3, 2 conditions, e.g. greater load or
or 1 gradients.
The footbrake is depressed
The vehicle is stationary
The accelerator pedal is not Winter programme T
actuated Press button T if you are having problems
The transmission fluid temperature starting off on a slippery road surface.
is greater than 0 C To activate
The winter programme can be activated in
As soon as the brake is released and the P, R, N, D and 3 (T illuminates in the
accelerator pedal is depressed, the transmission display). The vehicle starts off
vehicle starts off in the usual manner. in 2nd gear.
To deactivate
The winter program is switched off by:
z pressing button T again,
z shifting to 2 or 1 manually,
z turning off the ignition.
In order to prevent damage, the winter
program switches off automatically at high
transmission oil temperatures.
Engine braking "Rocking the car"

In order to utilise the engine braking If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle
effect when driving downhill, select drive to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole,
range 3, 2 or, if necessary, 1 in good time. move the selector lever from D to R in a
Gear 1 has the greatest braking effect. If repeat pattern while simultaneously
gear 1 is selected at too high a speed, the applying light pressure to the accelerator
transmission remains in second gear until pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid
the shift point for first gear is reached, sudden acceleration.
e.g. as a result of deceleration. This applies only to the exceptional
circumstances mentioned above.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator pedal past the
pressure point: depending on the engine
speed the transmission shifts to a lower
gear. Full engine power is available for
accelerating.
Stopping the vehicle

The selector lever can be left in the chosen
gear with the engine running.
When stopping on gradients engage
handbrake or depress brake pedal. To
prevent overheating of the transmission,
do not increase engine revolutions to
ensure smooth idling while standing if a
gear has been selected.
Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
crossings.
Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the
Manoeuvring the vehicle handbrake. Then select P. Remove the Fault
To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth ignition key or, with Open&Start system, If there is a problem with the automatic
during attempts to park or in garage remove the electronic key 3 from the transmission, control indicator A
entrances, the vehicles creeping vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the illuminates. The transmission no longer
movement can be utilised by releasing the battery may become discharged if the shifts automatically. The vehicle can
brake pedal. vehicle is parked up for long periods. continue to be driven.
Never actuate accelerator and brake The ignition key can only be removed when Illumination of control indicator A may
pedals simultaneously. the selector lever is in position P. also indicate a problem with the engine
With the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes electronics, see page 206.
in the transmission display for 10 seconds For diesel engines1) Z 19 DT and Z 19 DTH,
when the ignition is switched off if P has not illumination of control indicator A could
been engaged or the handbrake has not also indicate that the diesel fuel filter must
been applied. be drained of water - see page 300.
workshop.
1)
Sales designation, see page 310 and 311.
The transmission no longer shifts

automatically. Vehicle can continue to be
driven. Second gear is not available.
Forward gears 1, 3 and 4 must be shifted
manually using selector lever:
1 = 1st gear
2 = 3rd gear
3, D = 4th gear
Interruption of power supply 3. Push the yellow catch forward with a

If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector screwdriver and move the selector lever
lever cannot be moved out of position P. out of P.
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using 4. Mount selector lever trim on centre
jump leads, see page 243. console and refit.
If the battery is not the cause of the fault, Reselecting P causes locking again. Have a
release selector lever: workshop eliminate the cause of the power
1. Apply handbrake. loss.
2. Release selector lever trim from centre

console at rear, fold upwards and rotate
to the left.
Automatic transmission with

ActiveSelect 3 9 Warning
This automatic transmission 3 allows Disregard of these instructions may lead
both automatic gearchanges (automatic to injuries or endanger life.
mode) and manual gearchanges (manual
mode) 3.
Selecting D puts the transmission in
The engine can only be started when the automatic mode.
selector lever is in position P or N. When
If the selector lever is moved to the left from
starting in position N, depress the
the D position, manual mode is activated.
footbrake or apply the handbrake. After
Gearchanges can then be made manually
the engine has started, depress the brake
by tipping the selector lever toward + or -.
before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate
whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been
selected and the brake is released, the
vehicle will "creep". Never operate the Transmission display
accelerator and the brake pedal Display of mode or selected gear in left
simultaneously. The selected gear is position of transmission display. The gear
displayed in the transmission display, that has been selected by the transmission
see page 184. appears in the right position of the
P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Automatic mode
M Manual mode with display of
selected gear
The selector lever can only be moved out of

position P or N with the ignition switched on
and the footbrake applied (selector lever
lock). In selector lever position N the
selector lever lock is activated after a delay
and only if the vehicle is stationary.
Selector lever settings P, R, N and D In position P or N, control indicator j

(automatic mode) illuminates red in the selector lever
P Park position. Front wheels locked. indicator strip if the selector lever is
Only engage when the vehicle is blocked.
stationary and the handbrake is To engage P or R, push button on selector
applied. "P" appears on the lever.
The engine can only be started with lever in
R Reverse gear. Only engage when the position P or N. When position N is selected,
vehicle is stationary. "R" appears on press footbrake or engage handbrake
the transmission display. before starting.
N Neutral or idle. "N" appears on the Do not accelerate during the selection
transmission display. procedure.
D Drive position for normal driving in 1st
gear to highest gear. "D" and the
current gear appear in the
If the engine speed is too slow, the

transmission automatically shifts down,
but not if the gear was selected below a
certain speed.
If a higher gear is selected below a certain
speed, the transmission does not shift
back.
No automatic shifting to a higher gear
takes place at high engine revs.
For safety reasons, kickdown is also
available in manual mode, see page 194.
The selected gear is displayed in the
transmission display, see page 184.
ActiveSelect (manual mode) Electronically controlled driving
Move selector lever out of position D and programmes
then forwards or backwards. z When SPORT mode is engaged, the
transmission shifts at higher engine revs
+ Shift to a higher gear
(unless cruise control is on). Control
- Shift to a lower gear indicator 1 illuminates in the
If a higher gear is selected at a speed that transmission display, see page 190.
is too slow or a lower gear is selected at a SPORT mode, see page 212.
speed that is too high, the gear will not be
changed. This prevents the revs from being z Winter programme: Press button T,
too low or too high. see next page.
z Automatic neutral shift function z The operating temperature programme

automatically sets the transmission to N automatically brings the catalytic
to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at converter to the temperature that is
traffic lights. required for optimum emission reduction
Automatic neutral is activated when the after a cold start by selecting an
following occur simultaneously: appropriate gear (increased engine
revs).
The selector lever is in automatic or
manual mode z The adaptive programme automatically
tailors gearshifting to the driving
The footbrake is depressed conditions, e.g. greater load or
The vehicle is stationary gradients.
The accelerator pedal is not
actuated
The transmission fluid temperature Winter programme T
is greater than 0 C Press button T if you are having problems
starting off on a slippery road surface.
As soon as the brake is released and the
accelerator pedal is depressed, the To activate
vehicle starts off in the usual manner. The winter programme can be operated in
automatic mode (T illuminates in
transmission display, see page 190). The
vehicle starts off in 2nd or 3rd gear
depending on the nature of the road
surface.
To deactivate Engine braking

The winter program is switched off by: The automatic transmission automatically
z pressing button T again, selects the driving programs with the best
z changing to manual mode, possible braking effect.
z turning off the ignition. If necessary, lower gears can also be
In order to prevent damage, the winter selected in manual mode to increase the
program switches off automatically at high braking effect. 1st gear has the greatest
transmission oil temperatures. braking effect.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator pedal past the
pressure point: depending on the engine
speed the transmission shifts to a lower
gear. Full engine power is available for
accelerating.
For safety reasons kickdown is available in
both automatic and manual mode.
"Rocking the car" Stopping the vehicle

If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle The selector lever can be left in the chosen
to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, gear with the engine running.
move the selector lever from D to R in a When stopping on gradients engage
repeat pattern while simultaneously handbrake or depress brake pedal. To
applying light pressure to the accelerator prevent overheating of the transmission,
pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid do not increase engine revolutions to
sudden acceleration. ensure smooth idling while standing if a
This applies only to the exceptional gear has been selected.
circumstances mentioned above. Switch off engine if stopping for a lengthy
period, e.g. in traffic jams or at level
crossings.
Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the
Manoeuvring the vehicle handbrake. Then select P. Remove the
To manoeuvre the vehicle back and forth ignition key or, with Open&Start system,
during attempts to park or in garage remove the electronic key 3 from the
entrances, the vehicles creeping vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Otherwise the
movement can be utilised by releasing the battery may become discharged if the
brake pedal. vehicle is parked up for long periods.
Never actuate accelerator and brake
pedals simultaneously.
The ignition key can only be removed when 2nd gear and the highest gear can be
the selector lever is in position P. selected in manual mode. Depending on
If the selector lever is not in position P when the nature of the problem, only the highest
the ignition is switched off, control gear may be available.
indicator j and P flash in the selector lever Only the highest gear is available in D in
indicator strip, see Fig. S 12103 on automatic mode.
page 191. Move the selector lever to
position P.
With the Open&Start system 3, "P" flashes
in the transmission display for 10 seconds
when the ignition is switched off if P has not
been engaged or the handbrake has not
been applied.
Fault
If there is a problem with the automatic
transmission, control indicator A
illuminates. The transmission no longer
shifts automatically. The vehicle can
continue to be driven.
Illumination of control indicator A may
also indicate a problem with the engine
electronics, see page 206.
For diesel engines1) Z 19 DT and Z 19 DTH,
illumination of control indicator A could
also indicate that the diesel fuel filter must
be drained of water - see page 300.
workshop.
1)
Reselecting P or N causes locking again.

Have a workshop eliminate the cause of
the power loss.
Interruption of power supply 3. To open, push the yellow catch down

If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector with a screwdriver and move the selector
lever cannot be moved out of position P lever out of P or N.
or N. 4. Refit the ashtray insert 3 or rubber
If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using covering on the bottom of the stowage
jump leads, see page 243. compartment 3 - see page 108.
If the battery is not the cause of the fault,
release selector lever:
1. Apply handbrake.
2. Remove the ashtray insert 3 or the
rubber covering on the bottom of the
stowage compartment 3 - see page 108.
Driving hints Electro-hydraulic power assisted steering Switching off the engine
The first 600 miles (1000 km) If the power-assisted steering fails when When you switch off, fans in the engine
Drive your vehicle at various speeds. Do being towed with the engine switched off, compartment may continue running for a
not use full throttle. Never allow the engine the vehicle can still be steered, but time to cool the engine.
to labour at low revs. considerably more force is required. If the engine temperature is very high, e.g.
Make good use of all gears. Depress the Driving in mountainous terrain or with a after driving in mountainous terrain: allow
accelerator pedal a maximum of around trailer/caravan the engine to idle for approximately two
three quarters of the available pedal travel The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its minutes in order to prevent heat
in all gears. cooling power is therefore independent of accumulation.
the engine speed. Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3
Do not drive faster than three quarters of
maximum speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is After running at high engine speeds or high
generated at high engine speeds and less engine loads, operate the engine briefly at
Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the at slower speeds, do not shift down when a low load or run in neutral for approx.
first 125 miles (200 km). climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping 30 seconds before switching off in order to
Never coast with engine not running with the gradient in the higher gear. protect the turbocharger.
Many units will not function in this situation Driving with a roof load Save energy more miles
(e.g. brake servo unit, electro-hydraulic Do not exceed the permissible roof load - Please observe the running-in hints on this
power steering). Driving in this manner is a see pages 232, 325. For reasons of safety, page and the tips for saving energy on the
danger to yourself and others. distribute the load evenly and secure it following pages.
Brake servo unit properly with retaining straps. Adjust the Good, technically correct and economical
When the engine is not running, the brake tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not driving ensures maximum durability and
servo unit is no longer effective once the drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h). Check performance for your vehicle.
brake pedal has been depressed once or and retighten the straps frequently.
twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but Observe country-specific regulations. Roof
significantly greater force is required for loads are not permitted on the Astra
braking. TwinTop.
Overrun Correct gear selection Cooling fan

The fuel supply is automatically shut off Engine in neutral and without revving in the The cooling fan is controlled via a
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is lower gears. Stop-and-go traffic and thermoswitch and therefore only runs if
being driven down long gradients or when driving at a speed too high for the selected necessary.
braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to gear or transmission ratio increases wear The cooling fan automatically switches on
take effect, do not accelerate during and fuel consumption. when the diesel particle filter is being
overrun and, if in manual transmission Change down cleaned 3 depending on the engine.
mode, do not de-clutch. To prevent When decreasing speed, shift down into
damage to the catalytic converter, overrun Pedals
the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch Do not place any objects in the footwell
cut-off is temporarily deactivated when the with a high-revving engine. This is
catalytic converter temperature is high. which could slip under the pedals and
especially important when hill climbing. inhibit the pedal travel.
Vehicles with turbocharged engine 3 Clutch operation
Flow-generated noises may be audible if To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited,
Always depress the clutch pedal hard to there must be no mats in the area of the
the accelerator is released quickly on the floor to prevent shifting difficulties and
account of air flow in the turbocharger. pedals.
transmission damage.
Engine speed Battery care
When driving do not use the pedal as a When driving slowly or when the vehicle is
Drive in a low engine speed range for each footrest; this will cause substantial clutch
gear as much as possible. stationary, e.g. in slow urban traffic,
wear. stop-and-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off
Warming up all unnecessary electrical loads where
After a cold start, the automatic possible (e.g. heated rear window, heated
transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in seats).
automatic mode shifts into higher gears at
higher rpm. This allows the catalytic De-clutch when starting in order to relieve
converter to quickly reach the temperature the strain on the starter and the battery.
required for optimum pollutant reduction.
Saving fuel, protecting the End-of-life vehicle recovery Warming up

environment For detailed information on Vauxhall s z Full throttle and warming up at idle
Trend-setting technology ongoing commitment to achieving an speed increase wear, fuel consumption,
In the development and manufacture of environmentally sustainable future, exhaust emission, the amount of
your vehicle, environmentally-friendly and including; design for recycling, take back of pollutant in the exhaust and the amount
in the main recyclable materials were used. End-of-Life Vehicle (ELVs) and the of noise.
The production methods used to make recycling of ELVs, view z Drive off as soon as possible after
www.Vauxhall.co.uk/recycling for details.
your vehicle are likewise environmentally- starting.
friendly. Energy and environment-conscious Uniform speed
Recycling of production wastes keeps the driving z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel
circulation of material closed. Reduction of z High noise levels and exhaust emissions consumption, the exhaust emissions, the
energy and water requirements also helps are often a result of driving without due proportion of pollutant in the exhaust
to conserve natural resources. attention to saving energy and gas and the noise level.
protecting the environment.
A highly advanced design means that your z Do not accelerate and brake
vehicle can be easily disassembled at the z You should therefore drive with energy in unnecessarily. Drive at uniform speed,
end of its working life, and the individual mind "more miles with less fuel". watching the road.
materials separated for subsequent re-use. Reduce the noise level and exhaust Avoid frequent starting off and stopping
Materials such as asbestos and cadmium emissions by adopting an environment- e.g. at traffic lights, in short distance
are not used. The refrigerant in the air conscious driving style. This is extremely traffic and in queues of traffic by means
conditioning system 3 is CFC-free. worthwhile and improves the quality of of clever planning. Select roads with
life. good traffic flow.
New painting techniques employ water as
a solvent. Fuel consumption depends to a great Idling
extent on your own personal driving z The engine also consumes fuel when
style. The following hints are intended to idling.
help you consume fuel at a rate that is as
close as possible to the specified levels, z If you have to wait for more than one
see page 316. minute, it is worthwhile switching off the
engine. Five minutes of idling
Check your vehicles fuel consumption corresponds to approximately 0.6 miles
every time you refuel. This facilitates (1 km) of driving.
early detection of any irregularities
causing increased fuel consumption.
Overrun z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal Repair and maintenance

z The fuel supply is automatically shut off results in distinct fuel savings with no z Improper repairs or adjustment and
during overrun, e.g. when the vehicle is major loss of speed. maintenance work can increase fuel
being driven down long gradients or consumption. Do not carry out work on
Drive at no more than around three
when braking, see page 199. the engine yourself.
quarters of maximum speed and you will
z To enable the overrun cut-off to come use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a You may out of ignorance infringe
into action and save fuel, do not great deal of time. environmental laws by not disposing of
accelerate or de-clutch during overrun. materials properly.
Tyre pressure
Correct gear selection z Inadequate tyre pressure, leading to Appropriate parts might not be recycled.
z High revs increase engine wear and fuel higher road resistance, costs money in Contact with some of the materials
consumption. two ways: for more fuel and increased involved may pose a health hazard.
z Do not race your engine. Avoid driving at tyre wear.
z We recommend that repair and
high engine speeds. z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off. maintenance be entrusted to your
Making use of the tachometer helps to Electrical loads Vauxhall Authorised Repairer.
save fuel. Drive in a low engine speed z The power consumption of electrical Extreme driving conditions
range for each gear as much as possible equipment increases fuel consumption. z Going up steep slopes, cornering, driving
with uniform engine speeds. Drive as on poor roads and winter driving all
z Switch off all auxiliary electrical loads
often as possible in top gear, select the increase fuel consumption.
(e.g. air conditioning 3, heated rear
next higher gear as soon as possible,
window) when not needed. Fuel consumption increases dramatically
and only change down when the engine
is no longer running perfectly smoothly. Roof racks, ski-holders in urban traffic and at winter
z Due to air resistance, a roof load can temperatures, especially on short trips
High speed when the engine operating temperature
increase fuel consumption by approx.
z The higher the speed, the higher the is not reached.
3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100 km).
consumption and the noise level. At top
speed, you consume a great deal of fuel z Remove them if they are not being used. z Follow the hints given above to keep
and produce excessive noise and consumption to a minimum under such
exhaust emissions. conditions.
Fuels, refuelling Fuel for petrol engines Fuel for diesel engines
Fuel consumption Normal commercial high-quality fuels with Diesel engines must be operated only on
Fuel consumption is determined under a maximum ethanol content of 5% in commercially available diesel fuel meeting
specific driving conditions, see page 316. accordance with DIN EN 228 are suitable the specifications of DIN EN 590.
(for catalytic converter see page 204, for Since January 2004, some oil companies
Special equipment increases the weight of octane numbers see pages 310, 311). The
the vehicle. As a result, they can increase have mixed their diesel fuel with upto 5%
quality thereof has considerable effect on Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters)
fuel consumption and reduce the specified the performance, running and service life
maximum speed. like RME (Rape-Oil Methyl Ester). This is in
of the engine. The additives mixed with the accordance with the current DIN EN 590
For the first few thousand miles, friction fuel are extremely important. For this and does not harm the fuel/injection
between the engine and transmission reason you must only refuel with high- system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel
components is higher. This increases fuel quality fuels containing additives. mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not
consumption. Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5% differ from conventional diesel fuel and do
do not comply with DIN EN 228 and must not influence the vehicles driveability.
not be used unless the vehicle has been Important: Diesel fuel mixed with 5% FAME
specifically developed and approved for according to DIN EN 590 must not be
these fuels. confused with 100% Bio Diesel, which is not
Fuel with too low an octane number can to be used in Vauxhall engines.
cause pinking. No liability can be accepted The flow and filterability of diesel fuel are
for resulting damage. temperature-dependent.
Petrol with a higher octane number can Diesel fuels with improved low temperature
always be used. properties are therefore available on the
The ignition timing adjusts automatically market during the winter months. Make
to the grade of fuel used (octane number), sure that you fill the tank with winter fuel
see pages 310, 311. before the start of the cold weather
Use of petrol with an octane rating of 95 season.
will ensure economical driving. Additives can be used with diesel fuels with
1)
For vehicles with Z20 LEH engine, use of winter properties that are guaranteed by
95 RON fuel reduces performance and the manufacturer and when using diesel
torque. fuel filters that are heated depending on
the outside temperature.
Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels
that are intended for petrol engines.
1)
Sales designation, see pages 310 and 311.
Fuel filler cap

If replacing the fuel filler cap, be sure to use
a genuine fuel filler cap for your model to
ensure full functionality. Diesel-engined
vehicles have special fuel filler caps.
Refuelling Fuel filler neck at right rear side of vehicle.

The tank flap is locked together with the
9 Warning doors, see page 40.
Care must be taken when handling fuel. Open the tank flap.
Before refuelling, switch off the engine Unscrew the fuel filler cap, remove and
and where applicable any auxiliary suspend from the tank flap.
heating with combustion chambers The fuel tank has a limiting system which
(see sticker on fuel filler cap). Switch off prevents overfilling of the tank.
mobile phones.
Correct filling depends to a large extent on Close fuel tank cover.

proper operation of the fuel dispensing Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately.
pump:
1. Fully insert the pump nozzle and switch 9 Warning
it on.
Fuel is flammable and explosive. When
2. After automatic switch off, the specified
handling fuel or in the immediate vicinity,
tank capacity is reached after continued,
avoid naked flames or sparks. Do not
measured filling. Leave the filler nozzle in
smoke. This also applies where the
place until the stop.
presence of fuel is revealed by its
To close, position the fuel filler cap and characteristic smell. If fuel odours occur in
rotate past the resistance until the cap the car, have a workshop eliminate the
audibly clicks over the retainer. fault immediately.
Catalytic converter,
exhaust gases
Catalytic converter for petrol engines
Leaded fuel will damage the catalytic
converter and parts of the electronic
system, rendering them inoperative.
High quality fuels other than those listed on
pages 202, 310, 311 (e.g. LRP1)) could
damage the catalytic converter.
1)
LRP = Lead Replacement Petrol.
Damage to the catalytic converter or the z If unburned fuel enters the catalytic Catalytic converter for diesel engines
vehicle may result if the following points converter, this may result in overheating Damage to the catalytic converter or the
are not observed: and irreparable damage to the catalytic vehicle may result if the following points
z On ignition faults, uneven running after converter. are not observed:
cold start, a clear drop-off in engine You should therefore avoid z On uneven running, a clear drop-off in
power or other unusual operating unnecessarily long use of the starter engine power or other unusual operating
symptoms which could indicate a fault in when starting off, running the tank dry symptoms, contact a workshop as soon
the ignition system, contact a workshop (an irregular fuel supply will lead to as possible. Continue driving if necessary
as soon as possible. Continue driving if overheating) and starting the engine by for a short time at low speed and low
necessary for a short time at low speed pushing or towing. revs.
and low revs. z If the control indicator Z flashes to Irregular engine running and a loss of
Irregular engine running and a loss of indicate emissions, back off until the engine power when the Electronic
engine power when the Electronic flashing stops and the control indicator Stability Program (ESPPlus 3) comes
Stability Program (ESPPlus 3) comes illuminates. Contact a workshop into action are the result of operating
into action are the result of operating immediately. Control indicator for conditions and are therefore of no
conditions and are therefore of no emissions Z, see page 206. significance - see page 210.
significance - see page 210.
Controlling exhaust emission Control indicator Z for exhaust Control indicator A for engine electronics
Some of the damaging substances Illuminates when the ignition is switched on Illuminates for a few seconds after the
in the exhaust such as carbon and during the start attempt. Goes off ignition is switched on.
monoxide (CO), hydrocarbons (HC) shortly after the engine starts running. If it illuminates when the engine is running,
and nitrous oxides (NOx) are reduced Illuminated with the engine running there is a fault in engine or transmission
to a minimum by making structural indicates a fault in the exhaust gas electronics. The electronic system switches
changes mainly in the injection system cleaning system. The permitted emissions to an emergency running programme. Fuel
and the ignition system in conjunction may be exceeded. Contact a workshop consumption may be increased and the
with the catalytic converter. immediately. driveability of the vehicle may be impaired.
Flashing with the engine running indicates In some cases, faults can be eliminated by
a fault which could lead to catalytic switching off the engine and restarting. If
converter damage. You may continue the control indicator comes on again when
driving without damage if you back off the engine is running, contact a workshop
until flashing stops and the control to eliminate the cause of the fault.
indicator comes on. Contact a workshop
immediately.
If it illuminates briefly, but does not recur, it Exhaust gases Diesel particle filter 3
is of no significance. The diesel particle filter system removes
Illumination of A can indicate water in the
9 Warning polluting soot particles out of the engine
diesel fuel filter 3, at the same time a exhaust gases. The system includes a self-
Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous cleaning function that operates
message appears in the service display,
carbon monoxide, which is colourless and automatically while driving. The filter is
see page 120. Have a workshop check the
odourless and could be fatal if inhaled. cleaned by burning the trapped soot
fuel filter for possible water residue.
If exhaust gases penetrate the vehicle particles at a high temperature. There may
If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, be an increase in fuel consumption,
interior, open a window and contact a
there is a fault in the immobiliser system. exhaust smell, and engine cooling fan
workshop.
The engine cannot be started, see page 31. operation 3 during the self-cleaning
Avoid driving with an open luggage operation.
compartment. Otherwise, exhaust gases
could penetrate the interior.
During the first drive smoke may develop

because of wax and oil evaporating on the
exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the
open for a while after the first drive and
avoid inhaling the fumes.
The self-cleaning function will

automatically operate while driving after
the engine has reached its normal
operating temperature. The control
indicator ! will continue to flash until the
self-cleaning operation is complete. This
may take up to 20 minutes of driving. The
speeds. If the vehicle is not moving for
more than a few minutes, then the self-
cleaning function will not operate.
Operation will continue when driving
resumes.
Picture no: 18537t.tif
The self-cleaning function can not operate We recommend that you do not turn the
automatically during certain driving ignition off until the self-cleaning operation
situations where the engine does not reach is complete. If you must turn the ignition off
its normal operating temperature. An before the operation is complete, then the
example of this would be driving only short operation will automatically resume when
distances in cold weather. If the filter needs driving the next time and after the engine
cleaning and recent driving situations did has reached its normal operating
not allow the function to automatically temperature.
operate, then the control indicator ! will
flash. If this occurs, then you may continue
to drive the vehicle normally. The vehicle
will not be damaged and does not require
service.
Maintenance Drive Control Systems

Have all maintenance work carried out at Interactive Driving System (= IDS+) 3
the intervals specified. We recommend IDS+ unites the sensors and control units of
that you entrust this work to your Vauxhall the Electronic Stability Program (ESPPlus),
Authorised Repairer, who has proper Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) and
equipment and trained personnel Continuous Damping Control (CDC). This
available. Electronic testing systems permit provides both excellent driving dynamics
rapid diagnosis and remedy of faults. This and greater safety.
way you can be certain that all
components of the vehicles electrical,
injection and ignition systems operate
correctly, that your vehicle has a low level
of pollutant emission and that the catalytic
converter system will have a long service
life.
The control indicator ! goes off as soon as
the self-cleaning operation is complete. You are thereby making an important
contribution towards keeping the air clean
and compliance with emissions legislation.
Checking and adjustment of the fuel-
injection and ignition systems is part of the
scope of inspection. For this reason you
should have all maintenance work carried
out at the intervals specified in your Service
Booklet.
Electronic Stability Programme ESPPlus is ready for operation as soon as

(ESPPlus) 3 the ignition is switched on and control
ESPPlus improves driving stability as indicator v goes out.
necessary in any driving situation When ESPPlus comes into action,
regardless of the type of road surface or v flashes.
tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels
from spinning irrespective of road surface The vehicle is now in a critical situation;
and tyre grip. ESPPlus allows you to keep control of the
vehicle and reminds you to match your
The system monitors vehicle movements. speed to the road conditions.
As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve
(understeers/oversteers) engine output is 9 Warning
reduced (the sound of the engine changes)
and individual wheels are specifically Do not let this special safety feature
braked. This considerably improves the tempt you into taking risks when driving.
driving stability of the vehicle on snow and Control indicator v
ice and on wet or slippery road surfaces. Traffic safety can only be achieved by Illuminates for a few seconds when the
adopting a responsible driving style. ignition is switched on. The system is now
ready for operation.
Flashing during driving:
This shows the system has come into
action. The engine output may be reduced
(the sound of the engine changes) and the
vehicle may be braked automatically to a
small degree.
Illuminates while driving: Continuous Damping Control 3

The system is switched off or a fault is (CDC)
present. Continued driving is possible. The CDC adapts vehicle damping to the current
driving stability can however deteriorate driving situation and road conditions.
depending on road surface conditions. The system continually monitors wheel and
Re-engage ESPPlus or have the cause of vehicle movements and immediately
the fault eliminated by a workshop. The modifies the damping of each shock
self-diagnosis integrated into the system absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally
facilitates rapid fault identification. adapted to the driving situation and road
Switching off 3 conditions.
With SPORT mode 3 engaged (LED in When SPORT mode is enabled the
SPORT button illuminated), the ESPPlus damping control is adapted for a sportier
can be disengaged for sports driving style. This adaptation leads to
performance. "harder" chassis calibration.
Hold the SPORT button depressed for ESPPlus is reactivated by pressing the
SPORT button again or switching on the SPORT mode - see right column.
around 4 seconds. Control indicator v will
illuminate. ESPoff will also appear in the ignition.
service display, see page 120. SPORT mode, see page 212.
9 Warning
Plus
ESP should not be deactivated if one
of the run-flat tyres 3 has no pressure.
SPORT mode 3
SPORT mode is used to change damping 3,
steering 3, throttle application 3 and the
shift point for automatic transmission 3
and Easytronic 3 while driving.
Damping and steering become more direct
and provide better contact with the road
surface. The engine reacts more quickly to
accelerator movements.
For automatic transmission 3 and
Easytronic 3, the shift times are reduced
and gear changes occur at higher engine
speeds (not when cruise control is on).
Control indicator IDS+ for To activate
Continuous Damping Control Press the SPORT button. The LED in the
Illuminates for around 10 seconds after button illuminates.
opening the drivers door. Illumination In vehicles with automatic transmission 3
during driving indicates a fault in the or Easytronic 3 the control indicator 1
system. The system is not functioning. For illuminates in the transmission display.
safety reasons, switches to the harder
chassis setting. Have the cause of the fault SPORT mode cannot be activated if the
eliminated by a workshop. The self- Winter programme 3 is running (vehicles
diagnosis integrated into the system with automatic transmission 3 or
facilitates rapid fault identification. Easytronic 3). Winter programme - see
pages 180, 186, 193.
To deactivate Cruise control 3

Briefly press the SPORT button again or Cruise control can store and maintain
switch off the ignition. The LED in the speeds between 20 mph (30 km/h) and
button goes out. 125 mph (200 km/h). Deviation from the
Holding it pressed switches off ESPPlus, stored speed may occur when driving up or
see page 211. SPORT mode remains downhill.
engaged. For safety reasons the cruise control
Switching the winter programme on 3 cannot be activated until the footbrake
(vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or has been operated once.
Easytronic 3) switches SPORT mode off. Cruise control is operated with
For winter programme, see buttons m, g, and on the turn
pages 180, 186, 193. signal stalk.
Do not use the cruise control if it is not
Control indicator IDS+ for SPORT mode advisable to maintain a constant speed
Illuminates for around 10 seconds after (e.g. in situations presenting a danger to
opening the drivers door. Illumination yourself and other road users, in heavy
during driving indicates a fault in the traffic or on winding, slippery or greasy
system. The system is not functioning. roads).
workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated
into the system facilitates rapid fault
identification.
With automatic transmission 3, only use

cruise control in D or in automatic mode
with Easytronic 3.
When the cruise control is active, reaction
times may be increased due to the different
position of the feet.
9 Warning
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring that vehicle speed is
appropriate for the speed limit and
driving conditions - even if cruise control
is engaged. Failure to follow the
instructions could lead to injuries or Control indicator m To activate
endanger life. When driving, control indicator m will Briefly press button m: the current speed is
illuminates as soon as the system is stored and maintained. The accelerator
switched on. pedal can be released.
Vehicle speed can be increased by
depressing the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is released, the
previously stored speed is resumed.
Increase To deactivate
With cruise control active, hold down Briefly press button : Cruise control is
button m or briefly press it repeatedly: switched off, control indicator m goes out
speed is increased continuously or in steps and the vehicle slowly decelerates. To
of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the continue driving, depress the accelerator
accelerator pedal. pedal in the usual manner.
When button m is released the current For reasons of safety, cruise control
speed is stored and maintained. deactivates under certain driving
Decelerate conditions.
With cruise control active, hold down For example:
button g or briefly press it repeatedly: z the vehicles speed drops below approx.
speed is reduced continuously or in steps of 20 mph (30 km/h) or
1.2 mph (2 km/h). z the brake pedal is depressed or
When button g is released the current z the clutch pedal is depressed or Parking distance sensor 3
speed is stored and maintained. The parking distance sensor makes reverse
z selector lever of automatic
parking easier by measuring the distance
transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in N.
between the vehicle and an obstacle at the
Resuming the stored speed rear, and giving an acoustic signal in the
Briefly press button g at a speed above passenger compartment.
20 mph (30 km/h): the speed selected
The system records the distance using four
before the cruise control was switched off is
sensors in the rear bumper.
resumed.
The value of the stored speed is deleted
when the ignition is turned off.
If the vehicle approaches an obstacle when

reversing, a series of signals can be heard
in the vehicle interior. The interval between
the signals becomes shorter as the
distance is reduced. If the distance is less
than 30 cm, the signal will be continuous.
9 Warning
Under certain circumstances, various
reflective surfaces on objects or clothing
as well as external noise sources may
cause the system to fail to detect
obstacles. For this reason, care must be
taken when reversing even if the parking
To activate distance sensor is operational. This is of Control indicator r
The parking distance sensor system particular importance when in the vicinity Illuminates:
activates automatically when the ignition is of pedestrians. Fault in system. The system is not
switched on and reverse gear is engaged. functioning.Have the cause of the fault
Its operational readiness is indicated by To deactivate eliminated by a workshop. The self-
illumination of the LED in button r. The system deactivates automatically diagnosis integrated into the system
when reverse gear is disengaged. facilitates rapid fault identification.
To deactivate the system when reverse
gear is engaged, press button r.
The LED in the button goes out.
To reactivate, press button r again.
Flashing: Caravan/trailer towing equipment 3,

The fault is due to sensors obstructed with caravan/trailer towing
snow or ice. The sensors must be The system automatically detects if a
undamaged and free of dirt, snow and ice. towbar is properly fitted to the vehicle.
Interference due to external sources of When towing, plugging the trailer cable
ultra sound (e.g. pneumatic drills, rotary into the socket automatically switches the
machines). Once the source of interference parking distance sensor off
is removed, the system will operate Fitting rear load racks 3
normally. Rear load racks, e.g. bicycle racks, fitted
near the sensors could disrupt the system.
Observe the note on the Astra TwinTop on
page 58.
Automatic level control 3

Automatic level control makes it possible to
keep the height of the vehicle constant
when subjected to different loads in the
rear (e.g. when towing a caravan or trailer).
This significantly improves driving
conditions.
The vehicle is automatically raised at the

rear, increasing the spring travel and
ground clearance.
The automatic level control system is
activated after approx. 1.9 miles (3 km),
depending on the vehicle loading and the
nature of the road surface.
Headlight range adjustment, see
page 146.
On function faults, do not utilise full load
capacity. Have the cause of the fault
Deflation detection system

(DDS = Deflation Detection System) 3
The deflation detection system
continuously monitors the speed of all
wheels while driving. If a tyre loses
pressure, it grows smaller and rotates more
quickly than the other wheels. If the system
detects a difference in speed, control
indicator w illuminates red.
Stop immediately and check tyre pressure.
Mount the spare wheel if necessary, see
pages 249, 252.
The system is operational when the ignition
is switched on and can detect pressure loss
from a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h).
Control indicator w Tyre pressure monitoring system 3

If control indicator w illuminates red while The tyre pressure monitoring system
driving, there is a loss of pressure. Stop continually checks the pressure and speed
immediately and check tyre pressures. A of all four wheels while driving.
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) is A pressure sensor is integrated in each
permitted for run-flat tyres 3. Observe the wheel. Once a minute, the pressure of each
information on page 230. tyre is sent to a control unit, where it is
If the control indicator w illuminates yellow, compared. If the system detects one or
there is a fault in the system. Have the more pressure differences, a message
cause of the fault eliminated by a appears on the information display.
workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated The current tyre pressures are displayed in
into the system facilitates rapid fault the Info display.
identification.
For the system to be operational, all wheels
The control indicator flashes three times must be equipped with pressure sensors
when the system is initialising. System initialisation
After correcting tyre pressure or changing and all tyres must be filled to the
prescribed pressure. The tyre pressure
9 Warning a tyre/wheel, the system must be initialised:
monitoring system automatically detects if
With the ignition switched on, press the
DDS button for approx. 4 seconds. Control the vehicle is being driven with a load of up
The deflation detection system does not
indicator w flashes 3 times. The system is to 3 persons or a full load.
replace manual checks with a suitable
gauge. operational after driving a certain
distance.
Check tyre pressures at least every
14 days and prior to any long journey; Only initialise the system if all tyres have
the tyres should be checked when cold. the prescribed pressure.
Dont forget to check the spare 3.
Tyre pressure, see pages 227, 337.

Once the ignition is switched on, the system

is operational and will continuously
monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of
approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) and above. 2 Board Computer Navi active
9 Warning BC 1
BC 2 Tyre pressure
The tyre pressure monitoring system does Timer check rear
not replace manual checks with a left
Tyres
suitable gauge. (value in bar)
14 days and prior to any long journey; OK
the tyres should be checked when cold.
Dont forget to check the spare 3.
Display of current tyre pressure A graphic indicating the left rear tyre is
Tyre pressure, see pages 227, 337. Select menu item Tyres from the Board shown together with the current tyre
Computer menu. pressure: Slight pressure deviation, reduce
The current pressure of each tyre is speed. Check pressure at next opportunity
displayed. with appropriate gauge and correct if
necessary.
Warning messages
A message is given on the information On the colour information display this
display to warn of inconsistent tyre report will appear in yellow.
pressures. In some versions, the message is
displayed in abbreviated form.
For example, the following messages can
be displayed:
Navi active
Attention!
Front left tyre
pressure loss
(value in bar)
OK
A graphic indicating the front left tyre is Control indicator w System initialisation
shown together with the current tyre If control indicator w illuminates up yellow The system must be initialised after a
pressure: Significant pressure deviation or while driving, there is a fault in the tyre wheel/tyre change: With the ignition
direct pressure loss! Steer out of flow of pressure monitoring system. Fitting a wheel switched on, press button DDS approx.
traffic as quickly as possible without without pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel 4 seconds. Control indicator w flashes
endangering other drivers. Stop and check 3) will also generate a fault in the system. 3 times. The system is operational after
the tyres. Have the cause of the fault remedied by a driving a certain distance.
Mount the spare wheel 3 if necessary - see workshop. The integral self-diagnostic Only initialise the system if all tyres have
pages 249, 252. A maximum speed of feature of the system allows faults to be the prescribed pressure (check when tyres
50 mph (80 km/h) is permitted for run-flat quickly remedied. are cold).
tyres 3. Observe the information on page
230.
On the colour information display this
report will appear in red.
Acknowledgement of warnings, see
page 130.
General information Sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring Brake system
The tyre pressure monitoring system does system can be fitted on request by a The brakes are an important factor for
not function when the emergency or a workshop. traffic safety.
spare wheel not fitted with a pressure When manually checking tyre pressure with
sensor is used, and the control indicator w To improve effectiveness, do not brake
a pressure gauge, screw the adapter onto unnecessarily hard for the first
illuminates yellow. The tyre pressure the valve. Tyre pressure, see page 337.
display shows .. The tyre pressure is then 125 miles (200 km) after new brake pads
monitored by the deflation detection On each tyre change, the valve inserts and have been fitted.
system, see page 218. sealing rings for the tyre pressure Brake pad wear must not exceed a
monitoring system must be replaced by a specified limit. Regular maintenance as
If a complete set of wheels without tyre workshop.
pressure control system sensors is mounted detailed in the Service Booklet is therefore
(e.g. four winter tyres), no error message The use of commercially available liquid of the utmost importance for traffic safety.
will be displayed. The tyre pressure filled run-flat systems or repair kits can Have worn brake pads replaced by a
monitoring system is not operational. The impair the function of the system. workshop.
tyre pressure of a set of wheels without Vauxhall-approved systems can be used.
sensors is monitored by the deflation Tested and approved pads give optimum
Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, braking performance.
detection system, see page 218. walkie-talkies) operated in the area could
cause interference in the tyre pressure Brake pads worn to the minimum level
monitoring system. cause grinding noises. You may continue
to drive but have the pads replaced as
soon as possible. To change the pads,
contact a workshop.
Footbrake Check the brake lights before starting out

The footbrake comprises two independent on a journey. On vehicles with check
brake circuits. control 3 the brake lights are checked
If one brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still automatically, see page 138.
be braked with the other brake circuit. Shortly after starting each journey the
However the braking effect will occur at a effectiveness of the brake system should
lower pedal position and considerably be tested at low speed and without
more force is required. The braking inconveniencing other traffic, especially if
distance is longer. Contact a workshop the brakes are wet, e.g. after the vehicle
before continuing to drive. has been washed.
To ensure the full pedal travel can be The brake fluid level should be checked
utilized, especially in case of a fault in one regularly. If the brake fluid level is too low
of the brake circuits, there must be no mats and the handbrake is not applied, control
in the vicinity of the pedals, see page 199. indicator R in the instrument panel
Brake assist illuminates, see page 114.
If the brake pedal is operated with a rapid, When the engine is not running, the
powerful push, the vehicle is automatically support of the brake servo unit disappears Hill Start Assist 3 (HSA)
braked at full braking power in order to once the brake pedal has been depressed The system helps pull away on inclines.
achieve the shortest possible braking once or twice. Braking effect is not After releasing the footbrake, if the
distance when full-on braking occurs reduced, but braking requires significantly handbrake is not applied the brakes are
(brake assist). greater force. This is especially important only released after 2 seconds. As soon as
to bear in mind when towing. the acceleration is sufficient to prevent
Maintain steady pressure on the brake rolling back, the brake is released.
pedal for as long as full-on braking is to
continue. When the brake pedal is
released, the maximum brake force
amplification is taken away.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u)

ABS continually monitors the brake system
and prevents the wheels from locking
regardless of the type of road surface or
tyre grip.
It starts to regulate the braking pressure as
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
The vehicle remains steerable, even in the
event of very heavy braking, for instance
on bends or when swerving to avoid an
obstacle. Even in the case of full-on
braking, the ABS makes it possible to drive
round an obstacle without releasing the
brakes.
Handbrake Brake system control indicator R
Always apply handbrake firmly without The control indicator illuminates when the ABS control is made apparent though a
operating the release button, and apply as ignition is switched on if the handbrake is pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of
firmly as possible on a downhill or uphill applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is the regulation process.
slope. too low. Brake fluid - see page 302.
9 Warning
The mechanical handbrake acts on the For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control
brakes on the rear wheels. It engages indicator flashes for a few seconds when For optimum braking, keep the brake
automatically when applied. the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is pedal fully depressed throughout the
To release the handbrake pull the lever up not applied. braking process, despite the fact that the
slightly, press the ratchet knob, and fully pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the
lower the lever.
9 Warning pressure on the pedal.
To reduce the operating forces of the If the control indicator comes on when Do not let this special safety feature
handbrake, depress the footbrake at the the handbrake is released, stop driving tempt you into taking risks when driving.
same time. immediately. Contact a workshop for Traffic safety can only be achieved by
assistance. adopting a responsible driving style.
Fault Wheels, tyres

See page 337 for suitable tyres and
9 Warning restrictions.
If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may Tyres fitted in the factory are adapted to
be subject to locking due to braking that the chassis and provide optimum driving
is heavier than normal. The advantages comfort and safety.
of ABS are no longer operational. The Changing tyre/wheel type
vehicle can no longer be steered and may Before conversion to other tyres or wheels,
swerve. note the changes required.
You can continue driving, provided you If tyres of a different size than those fitted
drive with care and anticipation. at the factory are used, the electronic
speedometer may require reprogramming
Have the cause of the fault eliminated by a to ensure that the correct speed is
Control indicator u for ABS workshop. The self-diagnosis integrated displayed.
It comes on for a few seconds after the into the system facilitates rapid fault
ignition is turned on. The system is ready identification. 9 Warning
for operation when the control indicator
goes out. Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may
lead to accidents and render the vehicle
If the control indicator does not go out
unroadworthy.
after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while
driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The
brake system remains operational without
ABS regulation.
Self-check
Each time the ignition is turned on and the
engine started, after moving away from a
speed of around 1.9 mph (3 km/h) the
system performs a self-check which may be
audible.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring Fitting new tyres Run-flat tyres 3 must not be combined with
system 3 Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is even conventional tyres.
With winter tyres or after conversion to better. Ensure that tyres on one axle are When disposing of tyres, follow the legal
different wheel sizes, sensors for the tyre z the same size requirements.
pressure monitoring system can be fitted z the same design
by a workshop on request. Otherwise the z the same make
system would not show the tyre pressure z and have the same tread pattern.
deviations.
Fit directional tyres such that they roll in the
Deflation detection system 3, direction of travel. The rolling direction is
see page 218, indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on
tyre pressure monitoring system 3, the sidewall.
see page 219.
Tyres fitted opposing the rolling direction
Vehicles with run-flat tyres 3 (e.g. when a tyre is changed) should be
When switching wheels, e.g. when refitted as soon as possible. This is the only
switching to winter tyres, use run-flat tyres way to obtain full benefit from the design
as there is no spare wheel or tyre repair kit properties of the tyre.
in the vehicle.
Run-flat tyres - see page 230.
Some brands of tyres have a beaded edge

for alloy wheels to protect against
damage. If wheel trim is used on steel
wheels with beaded-edge tyres, the
following specification must be followed:
z Use of wheel trims and tyres that
approved by Vauxhall for the vehicle in
question and thereby fulfil all
requirements for the wheel and tyre
combination.
z If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not
have a beaded edge.
9 Warning Tyre pressure In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring

Check tyre pressure, including the spare system 3 there is an adapter in the valve
Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel trims wheel, at least every 14 days and prior to cap key. Screw adapter to valve before
could lead to sudden loss of air and any long journey; the tyres should be attaching tyre pressure gauge, see
thereby accidents. checked when cold. Dont forget to check page 219.
the spare 3. Tyre pressure, see page 337 and the
Use the valve cap key to make unscrewing adhesive foil 3 on the inside of the tank
the valve caps easier. The key is located on flap. Have adhesive foil replaced after
the inside of the tank flap. changing to different tyre size.
Do not reduce tyre pressure when the tyres
are warm. Otherwise the pressure may
drop below the permissible minimum when
the tyres cool down.
Hidden tyre damage is not eliminated by

adjusting the inflation pressure.
9 Warning
Incorrect tyre pressure could lead to a flat
tyre.
After having checked the tyre pressure, Tyre condition, wheel condition
tighten the valve caps using the valve cap Drive over edges slowly and at a right
key. angle if possible. Driving over sharp edges
Incorrect inflation pressures will impair can lead to hidden tyre damage and wheel
safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel damage which is only noticed later on.
economy and will increase tyre wear. When parking, ensure that the tyres are not
If the pressure is too low, this can result in pressed against the edge of the kerb.
considerable tyre warm-up and internal
damage, leading to tread separation and
even to tyre blow-out at high speeds.
Check tyres regularly for damage

(penetrated foreign bodies, punctures,
cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls). Check
wheels for damage. If damage or unusual
wear is found, contact a workshop.
9 Warning
Damage may lead to tyre blow-out.
Tread depth The legally permissible minimum tread

Check tread depth regularly. depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when
If wear in the front is greater than that in the tread has worn down as far as one of
the rear, move the rear wheels to the front the wear indicators (TWI1)). A number of
axle and vice versa. wear indicators are spaced at equal
intervals around the tyre within the tread.
Correct the tyre pressure. Their position is indicated by markings on
In vehicles with a deflation detection the tyre sidewall.
system 3 or tyre pressure monitoring
system 3 initialise system, see
pages 219, 221.
For reasons of safety, tyres should be
replaced when their tread depth has worn
down to 2 to 3 mm (winter tyres: 4 mm).
1)
TWI = Tread Wear Indicator.
General information Tyre designations Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3

z The danger of aquaplaning is greater if Meanings: Run-flat tyres have reinforced, self-
the tyres are worn. e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H supporting sidewalls, which ensure that the
z Tyres age, even if they are used only very tyres always have a certain amount of
little or not at all. A spare wheel which 195 = Tyre width in mm driveability, even when there is no pressure.
has not been used for six years should be 65 = Cross-section ratio Run-flat tyres are only permitted on
used only in emergencies; drive slowly (tyre depth to width) in % vehicles with ESPPlus and tyre pressure
when using such tyres. R = Belt type: Radial monitoring system or deflation detection
z Never fit used tyres the previous history system.
RF = Type: RunFlat
and use of which you do not know.
15 = Wheel diameter in inch 9 Warning
z So as not to impair brake cooling, use 91 = Load index
only wheel trims approved for use on e.g. 91 corresponds to 618 kg Even the tyre pressure of run-flat tyres
your vehicle. must be checked regularly.
H = Speed code letter:
Speed code letters: 14 days and prior to any long journey;
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) the tyres should be checked when cold.
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) Depending on tyre manufacturer, run-flat
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) tyres can be identified from a marking on
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) the tyre wall. E.g. ROF = RunonFlat for
Goodyear or SSR = Self Supporting Runflat
V up to 150 mph (240 km/h) Tyre for Continental.
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Run-flat tyres may only be used in
combination with Vauxhall-approved alloy
wheels; this also applies to winter tyres.
Driving with a damaged tyre Winter tyres 3 Wheel covers 3

A loss in tyre pressure is indicated by the For notes on fitting new tyres, see If the wheel trims and tyres used are not
tyre pressure monitoring system 3 or the page 225. Vauxhall-approved, make sure that the
deflation detection system 3. Limitations - see pages 230, 337. tyres do not have a beaded edge,
If a tyre has no pressure, continued driving see page 227.
Winter tyres improve safety at
is possible temperatures below 7 C and should
z at a speed of max. 50 mph (80 km/h) therefore be fitted on all the wheels.
z up to a distance of 50 miles (80 km). The design of summer tyres means they
have limited qualities for winter driving.
9 Warning
If the maximum permissible speed for the
When driving with a flat tyre, do not winter tyres is less than that of the vehicle,
exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) a notice indicating the maximum
or a distance of 50 miles (80 km). permissible speed for the tyres must be
affixed within the drivers field of vision1).
The vehicle will be more difficult to steer
and handle and the braking distance will If you use the spare wheel when it is fitted
be longer. with a summer tyre, the vehicles
driveability may be affected, especially on
Adapt driving style and speed to the
slippery road surfaces. Obtain a
conditions at hand.
replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as
possible, and have the wheel balanced
Do not use a tyre repair kit.
and fitted to the vehicle.
Deflation detection system 3, see page 218,
tyre pressure monitoring system 3, see
page 219.
1)
Varies from country to country on account of
national regulations.
Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into Roof racks 3

contact with parts of the chain and be
damaged. Remove the wheel trim, see 9 Warning
page 252.
Disregard of these notes can lead to
Tyre chains may only be used at speeds up
injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle
to 30 mph (50 km/h) and, when travelling
on roads that are free of snow, they may be
accordingly.
used for brief periods only since they are
subject to rapid wear on a hard road and For safety reasons, and to prevent roof
may snap. damage, we recommend use of the
Temporary spare wheel 3 Vauxhall roof rack system approved for
Tyre chains must not be used on the your vehicle.
temporary spare wheel. If you need to use Roof loads are not permitted on the
tyre chains after suffering a flat front tyre, Astra TwinTop.
Tyre chains 3 fit the temporary spare on the rear axle
Limitations and further information, see and transfer one of the rear wheels to the Fasten the roof rack following the
page 337. front axle. instructions that accompany the system.
Tyre chains are only permitted on the drive For notes on the temporary spare wheel, Driving hints, see page 198.
wheels (front axle). They must be fitted to see page 250.
the tyres symmetrically in order to achieve
a concentric fit. Wheel changing, see page 252.
Always use fine mesh chains that add no Correct the tyre pressure.
more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the Deflation detection system 3, see page 218,
inboard sides (including chain lock). tyre pressure monitoring system 3, see
page 219.
Towing equipment 3
9 Warning
Disregard of these notes can lead to
accordingly.
Only use a trailer towing device approved

for the vehicle. Have a towing device fitted
by workshop, who will inform you of any
possible trailer load increases. They will
have the instructions for fitting the device
and any necessary changes to the vehicle
Version without roof railing Version with roof railing 3 concerning cooling, heat shields or other
Lift the covers from the fitting openings. To attach the roof rack, insert mounting devices.
Attach roof rack at appropriate points, see bolts in the bores shown in the picture, see
instructions provided with the roof rack Observe the note on the Astra TwinTop on
enclosed roof luggage rack system page 58.
instructions. system.
Do not mount towing equipment to
vehicles with Z 20 LEH1) engine.
9 Warning
The coupling ball bar is to be removed
when not towing.
For installation dimensions of the trailer

towing equipment, see pages 348, 349, 350.
1)
Stowage of coupling ball bar Fitting the coupling ball bar Checking the tensioning of the coupling
In Hatchbacks, the coupling ball bar is in a Disengage and fold down the socket. ball bar:
pouch, fastened in the luggage Remove the sealing plug from the hole for z Red marking on turn knob points
compartment cargo box with a strap - see the coupling ball bar and stow it in the towards white marking on coupling ball
page 237. luggage compartment. bar.
In Estates, the coupling ball bar is fastened z Gap of approx. 6 millimetres between
with a strap in a compartment in the spare turn knob and coupling ball bar.
wheel well of the luggage compartment. z Key is in lock at position 1.
Otherwise, the coupling ball bar must be Inserting the coupling ball bar Lock coupling ball bar (key to position 2,
tensioned before it is inserted into the Insert the tensioned coupling ball bar into see Fig. 17222 T on page 234). Remove key
coupling housing: the coupling housing and push firmly and press protective flap into position.
z Unlock coupling ball bar (key to upwards until the coupling ball bar audibly When the coupling ball bar is locked the
position 1), see Fig. 17222 T on engages in position. turn knob can no longer be pulled out.
page 234. The turn knob snaps back into its home
z Pull turn knob out and then turn it position resting against the coupling ball
clockwise as far as it will go, see bar.
Fig. 17223 T.
9 Warning
Do not touch the turn knob when
inserting the coupling ball bar - risk of
injury.
Important Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the

Check that the coupling ball bar is correctly coupling ball bar. Fold away the socket,
installed: see Fig. 17221 T on page 234.
z Green marking on turn knob points Do not use steam-jet cleaners or other
towards white marking on coupling ball high-pressure cleaners to clean the
bar. coupling ball bar.
z No gap between turn knob and coupling
ball bar.
z Coupling ball bar must be seated firmly
in coupling housing.
z Coupling ball bar must be locked and
key must be removed.
9 Warning Dismounting the coupling ball bar

Unlock coupling ball bar (key to position 1,
Towing a caravan/trailer is only see Fig. 17222 T on page 234).
permitted with a correctly mounted
towbar. If the towbar cannot be correctly Pull out turn knob and then turn it clockwise
mounted, contact a workshop for as far as it will go. Pull coupling ball bar
assistance. down out of the coupling housing and stow
in compartment in the luggage
compartment, see page 234.
Eye for break-away stopping cable
In the case of caravans/trailers with brake,
attach the break-away stopping cable to
the eye (arrow in Fig. 17225 T).
Caravan/trailer towing The permissible caravan/trailer load should

Caravan and trailer loads1) be fully utilised only by drivers who are
The permissible caravan/trailer loads are adequately experienced in towing large or
vehicle- and engine-dependent maximum heavy caravans/trailers.
values which must not be exceeded. The The permitted caravan/trailer load applies
actual caravan/trailer load is the difference up to the specified incline and up to an
between the actual gross weight of the altitude of 1000 metres above sea-level.
caravan/trailer and the actual coupling Since engine power decreases as altitude
socket load with the caravan/trailer increases because of the air becoming
coupled. When the caravan/trailer load is thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability,
being checked, therefore, only the the permitted towing weight also
caravan/trailer wheels and not the jockey decreases by 10% for every 1000 metres of
wheel must be standing on the weighing additional altitude. The towing weight
apparatus. does not have to be reduced when driving
Stowage of coupling ball bar The permissible caravan/trailer loads for on roads with slight inclines (less than 8%,
Hatch your vehicle are given in the vehicle e. g. motorways).
Stow the coupling ball bar in the pouch and documents. Unless otherwise stated, they
fasten it in the luggage compartment are valid for gradients up to max. 12%.
cargo box with the strap.
Estate
Stow the coupling ball bar in the
compartment in the spare wheel well of the
luggage compartment, fastening it with
the strap.
1)
Observe national regulations.
The actual caravan/trailer load plus the Coupling socket load Rear axle load during towing
actual gross weight of the towing vehicle The coupling socket load is the load With a trailer coupled and the towing
must not exceed the maximum permitted exerted by the trailer/caravan on the vehicle fully loaded (including all
towing weight. For example, if the coupling ball. It can be varied by changing occupants), the permissible rear axle load
permitted gross vehicle weight is utilised, the weight distribution when loading the (see identification plate or vehicle
the trailer/caravan load must only be used trailer/caravan. documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg
until the maximum permitted towing The maximum permissible coupling socket and the permissible gross vehicle weight
weight is reached. The maximum load (75 kg) is specified on the towing by 45 kg for the Hatch. For the Estate, the
permitted towing weight is shown on the equipment identification plate and in the permissible rear axle load may be
identification plate, see page 308. vehicle documents. Always aim for the exceeded by 60 kg and the permissible
maximum load, especially in the case of gross vehicle weight by 30 kg. If the
heavy caravans/trailers. The coupling permissible rear axle load is exceeded a
socket load should never fall below 25 kg. maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h)
applies (50 mph / 80 km/h if approved for
When measuring the coupling socket load, use as a commercial vehicle). If national
make sure that the drawbar of the loaded regulations specify a lower maximum
trailer/caravan is at the same height as it speed for vehicles towing a trailer, this
will be when the trailer/caravan is coupled must be observed.
with the towing vehicle loaded. Particularly
important for trailers/caravans with
tandem axle.
Trailer Stability Assist 3 (TSA)

TSA monitors vehicle movements when
towing a caravan or trailer. If the system
detects lurching movements, engine power
is reduced and the vehicle/trailer
combination is selectively braked until the
lurching ceases.
TSA is a function of the electronic stability
programme (ESPPlus), see page 210.
Tyre pressure Driving characteristics, towing tips

Increase the tyre pressure on the towing In the case of trailers/caravans with brakes,
vehicle to the value specified for a full load, attach breakaway stopping cable to eye.
see page 337. Check the pressure of the Before attaching the trailer/caravan,
spare wheel and caravan/trailer wheels. lubricate the ball of the trailer/caravan
towing device. However, do not lubricate
the ball if a stabiliser, which acts on the
coupling ball, is being used to damp
hunting.
Check caravan/trailer lighting before
starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the
vehicle are deactivated when towing a
caravan or trailer.
Caravans/trailers with LED turn signals If the trailer/caravan starts to sway, drive Starting on inclines
must have a provision that makes it more slowly, do not attempt to correct the For vehicles with manual transmission,
possible to monitor standard light bulbs. steering and brake sharply if necessary. the most favourable engine speed when
Turn signal control indicator - see If it is necessary to apply the brakes fully, starting off on an incline is between 2500
page 116. depress the brake pedal as hard as and 3000 rpm for petrol engines and
possible. between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel
Parking distance sensor 3 is deactivated engines. Hold engine speed constant,
when towing. Remember that the braking distance for engage clutch gradually (let slip), release
Handling is greatly influenced by the vehicles towing caravans/trailers with and handbrake and open throttle. If possible,
loading of the trailer/caravan. Loads without brake is always greater than that the engine speed should not drop during
should therefore be secured so that they for vehicles not towing a caravan/trailer. this procedure.
cannot slip and be placed in the centre of When driving downhill, the brakes are In vehicles with automatic transmission 3
the trailer/caravan if possible, i.e. above under considerably more load when towing and Easytronic 3 it is sufficient to apply full
the axle. a caravan/trailer. For this reason, drive in throttle in D or 3 in automatic mode.
In the case of trailers with low driving the same gear as if driving uphill and drive
at a similar speed. Before starting off under extreme
stability or caravans with a permitted conditions (high combination weight,
gross vehicle weight of over 1300 kg Automatic transmission 3 or Easytronic 3 mountainous terrain with steep inclines),
(Hatch)/1200 kg (Estate), do not exceed a in automatic mode will automatically switch off all unnecessary electrical loads
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h); the use of a select the driving programme with the (e.g. heated rear window, air conditioning
friction-type stabiliser is highly optimum engine braking effect. system 3, heated front seats 3).
recommended. The gears can be selected manually if
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) required.
if possible, even in countries where higher The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its
speeds are permitted. cooling power is therefore independent of
Make sure that you have enough room the engine speed.
when cornering and avoid sudden Since a considerable amount of heat is
manoeuvres. generated at high engine speeds and less
at slower speeds, do not shift down when
climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping
with the gradient in the higher gear.
Self-help, vehicle care 241
Self-help, 9 Warning
vehicle care Disregard of these notes can lead to
Diesel fuel system, bleeding ............... 241 accordingly.
Bonnet .................................................. 241
Starting................................................. 242 Diesel fuel system, bleeding
Starting the engine with jump leads Never let the tank run dry! If control
3 ......................................................... 243 indicator Y illuminates, refuel as soon as
Towing .................................................. 244 possible. Refuel immediately if it flashes.
Warning triangle 3......................... 247 Restarting after running out of fuel is
First-aid kit (cushion) + 3................... 247 possible, but starting behaviour will be
Spare wheel 3...................................... 249 delayed. Turn on the ignition three times Bonnet
Jack 3 and vehicle tools 3 ............ 251 for 15 seconds each time. Then start the To open the bonnet, pull the release lever
Changing wheels ................................. 252 engine for a maximum of 40 seconds1). If it located on the drivers side below the
Tyre repair kit 3 ................................... 256 does not start, repeat the process after instrument panel. The bonnet will then be
Electrical system .................................. 259 waiting at least 5 seconds. If the engine still unlocked and will partially open. Return
does not start, contact a workshop. release lever to its original position.
Fuses and the most important
circuits they protect .......................... 262
Bulb replacement ................................ 269
Halogen headlight system.................. 269
Xenon headlight system 3,
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL)
system 3 ............................................ 273
Front turn signal lights ........................ 276
Side turn signal lights .......................... 276
Fog lights 3.......................................... 276
Tail lights .............................................. 277
Number plate light .............................. 286
Courtesy lights ..................................... 287
Vehicle care.......................................... 289
1)
On engines Z 17 DTH, for technical reasons
only 30 seconds is possible. Sales designation
see pages 310 and 311.
242 Self-help, vehicle care
The bonnet is held open automatically 3. Starting

In an alternative version, the bonnet is held Do not start with quick charger
open by inserting the support that is This prevents damage to electronic
located across the radiator into the small components.
elongated hole in the underside of the Do not start by pushing or towing
bonnet. Because your vehicle is fitted with a
Push support firmly into holder before catalytic converter, it must not be started
closing the bonnet. Lower bonnet and by pushing or towing, see page 204.
allow to fall into lock. Vehicle with the Open&Start system 3 must
Check that the bonnet is locked in position not be started by pushing or towing if the
by pulling at its front edge. If it is not battery is discharged, since the steering
engaged, repeat the procedure. column lock cannot be released.
The vehicle can only be started using jump
There is a safety catch on the underside of leads see following page.
the bonnet: lift this upwards and open the
bonnet.
Dirt on snow on the bonnet can slide onto
the windscreen when opened and block the
air intake.
Air intake, see page 174.
Starting the engine with jump leads 3 z Use auxiliary battery with same voltage
A vehicle with a discharged battery can be (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) must not be
started using jump leads and the battery of considerably less than that of the
another vehicle. discharged battery. Voltage and
capacity information can be found on
9 Warning the batteries.
z Use jump leads with insulated terminals
Be extremely careful when starting with
and a cross section of at least 16 mm2
jump leads. Any deviation from the
(25 mm2 for diesel engines).
following instructions can lead to injuries
or damage caused by battery explosion z Do not disconnect the discharged
or damage to the electrical systems of battery from the vehicle.
both vehicles. z Switch off all unnecessary electrical
consumers.
z Never expose the battery to naked z Do not lean over the battery during jump
flames or sparks. starting.
z A discharged battery can freeze at z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to
temperatures of 0 C. Defrost the frozen touch those of the other lead.
battery in a warm room before
z The vehicles must not come into contact
connecting jump leads.
with each other during the jump starting
z Do not allow battery fluid to come into process.
contact with eyes, skin, fabrics or
z Apply handbrake. Manual transmission
painted surfaces. The fluid contains
or Easytronic 3 in neutral, automatic
sulphuric acid which can cause injuries
transmission 3 in P.
and damage in the event of direct
contact.
z Wear eye protection and protective
clothing when handling a battery.
z Do not connect leads to negative

terminal of discharged battery!
z The connection point should be as far
away from the discharged battery as
possible.
z Route the leads so that they cannot
catch on rotating parts in the engine
compartment.
z Start the engine of the vehicle providing
the jump start.
z After 5 minutes, start the other engine.
Start attempts should be made at
intervals of 1 minute not last longer than
Connect the leads in the order see 15 seconds. Towing
Fig. 17230 T: Towing of vehicle
z After starting, allow both engines to idle
1. Connect one end of the first jump lead to To open the cover concealing the towing
for approx. 3 minutes with the leads
the positive terminal 1 of the battery eye socket at the front right of the vehicle:
connected.
providing the jump start (identified by disengage the cover at the bottom and pull
"+" sign on battery case or terminal). z In order to avoid excess voltage in the it off downwards.
electrical system, before removing a
2. Connect the other end of this lead to the For versions with tyre repair set 3, the
lead, switch on an electrical consumer
positive terminal 2 of the discharged towing eye is in the stowage compartment
(e.g. light, heated rear window) in the
battery ("+" sign). in the boot below the loading floor cover,
vehicle receiving the jump start.
3. Connect the first end of the other jump see page 256.
z Reverse above sequence exactly when
lead to the negative terminal 3 of the For versions with spare wheel 3, the towing
removing leads.
battery providing the start ("" sign). eye is in the stowage compartment for the
4. Connect the other end of the second jack 3 and tool kit 3 below the spare
jump lead 4 to ground on the other wheel, see page 251.
vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw
connection in the engine suspension.
Vehicles with the Open&Start system 3 Vehicles with automatic transmission 3

must not be towed when the battery is should be towed facing forward only and
discharged because the steering column must not be towed faster than 50 mph
lock cannot be released. Towing is only (80 km/h) or further than 60 miles (100 km).
possible with the ignition switched on. Use If the transmission is defective, or if the
jump leads to start the engine if necessary. above speed or distance is to be exceeded,
Manual transmission or Easytronic 3 in the front axle must be raised off the
neutral, automatic transmission 3 in N. ground.
Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive Contact a workshop for assistance.
tractive force can damage the vehicle. On vehicles with Easytronic 3, if the
automatic clutch has been released
9 Warning manually on a power failure, towing is not
possible, see page 183. In this case contact
For braking and steering, significantly a workshop immediately for assistance.
Screw in the towing eye anti-clockwise as higher forces are required: brake
far as it will go until it stops in a horizontal After towing, unscrew the towing eye
assistance and steering assistance are
position. clockwise and refit the cover.
effective only with the engine running.
Attach a tow rope 3 or better still a tow Towing service
rod 3 to the eye. To prevent the entry of exhaust fumes from Entrust your vehicle only to the towing
the towing vehicle, switch on the air service of your choice and obtain an
The towing eye must only be used for recirculation 3 and close the windows. estimate on towing costs before employing
towing, not for recovering the vehicle. any towing service. In this way you avoid
Switch on ignition to release steering unnecessary costs and possible insurance
column lock and to permit operation of problems during claim processing.
brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper.
Towing another vehicle On some versions 3: remove the cover Screw in the towing eye anti-clockwise as
To open the cover concealing the towing concealing the towing eye at the rear right far as it will go until it stops in a horizontal
eye socket at the rear right of the vehicle: of the vehicle by disengaging the tabs at position.
disengage the cover at the bottom and pull the bottom and pulling off the cover from Attach a tow rope 3 or better still a tow
it off downwards. the top. rod 3 to the eye.
For versions with tyre repair set 3, the The towing eye must only be used for
towing eye is in the stowage compartment towing, not for recovering the vehicle.
in the boot below the loading floor cover,
see page 256. Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive
tractive force can damage the vehicle.
For versions with spare wheel 3, the towing
eye is in the stowage compartment for the After towing, unscrew the towing eye
jack 3 and tool kit 3 below the spare clockwise and refit the cover.
wheel, see page 251. Version with cover 3: install by inserting the
bottom lugs of the cover 3 in the bumper,
folding and then press the lugs at the top
into place.
Warning triangle 3 Estate, Van First-aid kit (cushion) + 3

Hatch, Astra TwinTop Insert the warning triangle in the retaining Hatch
Store warning triangle in rear luggage straps of the tailgate inner panelling. Secure the first-aid kit to the right luggage
compartment wall: first fit warning triangle compartment wall using the retaining
into recess on left and the insert in guide on strap.
right.
To remove the warning triangle, lift to the
right and pull out to the right.
For vehicles with cargo box 3: Lift the
warning triangle with the right half of the
cargo box. Pull out the warning triangle to
the right.
Estate Van Astra TwinTop

Fasten the first-aid kit (cushion) to the left Place first-aid kit in stowage compartment Store the first-aid kit (cushion) in the recess
luggage compartment wall with a behind drivers seat. To open the cover, behind the strap in the left luggage
retaining strap. press the locking tab. compartment wall.
Spare wheel 3 Stowing wheels with wide tyres in the

Some vehicles are equipped with a tyre spare wheel well
repair kit instead of a spare wheel see The spare wheel well is not designed for all
page 256. permitted tyre sizes. If a wheel wider than
the spare must be stowed in the spare
wheel well after changing wheels, the floor
cover can be placed on the projecting
wheel.
This must be taken into consideration when
the luggage compartment is being loaded,
particularly with the Astra TwinTop see
page 60.
Spare wheel placed in luggage

compartment
The spare wheel is in the luggage
compartment beneath the floor cover. It is
secured with a nut.
The estate also has a spacer above the
securing nut.
General information Notes on temporary spare wheel 3

Depending on version, the spare wheel z Using a temporary spare wheel may
may be in the form of a temporary spare change the driving behaviour of the
wheel 3. Refer to the notes on this page vehicle, particularly if using winter
and pages 232, 255, 337. tyres 3. Replace defective tyre as quickly
On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare as possible, balance wheel and fit to
wheel may have a steel rim. vehicle.
If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel z Fit only one temporary spare wheel.
may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you z Do not drive faster than 50 mph
use the spare wheel the vehicles handling (80 km/h).
may be altered. Obtain a replacement for z Take curves slowly.
the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and
have the wheel balanced and fitted to the z Do not use the temporary spare wheel
vehicle. for a lengthy period.
Estate
The spare wheel may have a smaller tyre z Replace temporary spare wheel with full
Take adapter 3 and hooks 3 from the
and a smaller rim than the wheels mounted specification wheel without delay.
rails 3 in the luggage compartment walls.
Raise the rear lashing eyes and lift the floor on the vehicle1): Using the spare wheel may z Tyre chains are not permitted on the
cover to the vertical position so that it rests alter vehicle handling. Have the defective temporary spare wheel. If tyre chains are
on the roof lining. tyre replaced as soon as possible, balance necessary after a front wheel puncture,
the wheel and have it mounted on the fit the temporary spare wheel to the rear
When closing, guide the lashing eyes vehicle. and a rear wheel to the front. Check tyre
through the slots in the floor cover.
pressure and adjust if necessary see
Vehicles with cargo box 3: Removal see page 337.
page 81.
z Follow temporary spare wheel
Astra TwinTop instructions on pages 232, 255, 337.
Accessing the spare wheel when the roof is
open: Engage luggage compartment cover
on the rear window frame and activate the
loading aid (see page 82). Raise the floor
cover in the luggage compartment.
1)
Country-specific version: The spare wheel is
only to be used as a temporary spare wheel.
Notes on directional tyres 3

Directional tyres only provide maximum
performance when they are mounted in the
correct direction of rotation. If the tyres or
spare wheel must be mounted opposing
the specified direction of rotation
(e.g. after changing a flat tyre), observe
the following:
z Vehicle handling may change. Have the
defective tyre replaced as soon as
possible, and have the wheel balanced
and mounted on the vehicle.
z Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h).
z Be especially careful when driving in rain Jack 3 and vehicle tools 3 Vehicles with spare wheel 3
and snow. The jack and the vehicle tools have been The jack and tool kit are in a stowage
specially developed for your vehicle and compartment in the boot below the spare
Further information on directional tyres wheel. Remove spare wheel, see page 249.
see page 225. must only be used on that vehicle. Only use
jack for changing wheels. After use, stow away the jack and tools in
On Astra VXR and vehicles with wheelarch the compartment as shown in Fig. 17242 T.
trims 3 or after-market trims, jacks may not Astra TwinTop: The tools for emergency
be used 3. The vehicle may be damaged. operation of the convertible hardtop are
Vehicles with tyre repair set 3 stowed in the glove compartment.
The tool kit and tyre repair set are in a
storage compartment below the floor
cover in the luggage compartment.
Changing wheels z Never change more than one wheel at z No people or animals may be in the
There may be a tyre repair kit instead of a once. vehicle when it is jacked-up.
spare wheel, see page 256. z Block the wheel diagonally opposite the z Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle.
To ensure your safety, make the following wheel to be changed by placing wedge z Do not start or run the engine while the
preparations and observe the following blocks or equivalent in front and behind vehicle is on the jack.
information when changing wheels: the wheel.
z Before inserting the wheel bolts when
z Park the vehicle on a level, firm and z Use the jack 3 only to change wheels. changing wheels, lightly grease the cone
non-skid surface.
z If the ground on which the vehicle is of each bolt. For this reason, carry some
z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply standing is soft, a solid board (max. 1 cm conventional grease.
handbrake, automatic transmission 3 thick) should be placed under the jack 3.
selector lever in P, manual transmission Using a thicker board could damage the
or Easytronic 3 engage 1st or reverse jack 3 and the vehicle.
gear.
z Correctly set up the warning triangle 3.
Warning triangle, see page 247.
z Remove spare wheel from luggage
compartment, see page 249.
z Before raising the vehicle, set the front
wheels to the straight-ahead position.
z On the Astra TwinTop, the roof must be
closed before the vehicle is raised.
1. Prise off the wheel trim using the hook Alloy wheels 3: Disengage the wheel bolt 2. Turn wheel bolts half a turn using the
included with the vehicle tools 3. For caps with a screwdriver and remove. wheel bolt wrench 3, pushing the
vehicle tools, see page 251. Protect the wheel by inserting a soft cloth wrench 3 on as far as possible.
For wheel trims with visible wheel bolts 3: between the screwdriver and alloy
The trim can remain on the wheel. Do not wheel.
remove the retaining washers 3 on the
wheel bolts.
3. The location of each jacking point 3 is 4. Before positioning the jack 3, set it to the Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and
indicated by a mark on the bottom edge necessary height by rotating the eye by turn crank to raise vehicle.
of the vehicle. hand. Position the jack 3 at the front or If this is not the case, carefully lower the
On Astra VXR and vehicles with rear so that the jack claw spans the vehicle immediately and reposition the
wheelarch trims 3 or after-market trims, vertical base and grips in the recess in jack.
jacks may not be used 3. The vehicle the vertical base. Make sure it is properly
positioned. 5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wipe clean with
may be damaged. a cloth. Then apply a light coating of
The jack base must be on the ground grease to the wheel bolts. Do not grease
directly below the jacking point in a the thread of the bolts. Do not put the
manner that prevents it from slipping. wheel bolts down in a location where
they may become soiled.
If the wheel bolts have retaining
washers 3, they must not be removed.
10. Before refitting the wheel trim, clean the 13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel
wheel around the retaining clips. Valve bolts on the new wheel checked on the
symbol 3 on back of wheel trim must vehicle using a torque wrench as soon
point towards valve on wheel. as possible and, if necessary, corrected.
Align and refit wheel trim or wheel bolt Tightening torque, see page 337.
caps 3. 14. Replace the faulty tyre on the wheel
Alloy wheels 3: Align and refit wheel that was removed.
bolt caps 3. 15. Replace temporary spare wheel 3 with
11. Stow replaced wheel, tools and warning a full specification wheel without delay.
triangle 3 in luggage compartment, see 16. Initialise the deflation detection
pages 247 to 251. system 3 or tyre pressure monitoring
12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly system 3, see pages 219, 221.
fitted wheel. Adjust as necessary.
6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare
wheel, see page 249, notes on
temporary spare wheel, see page 250.
7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slightly,
inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far
as possible.
8. Lower vehicle.
9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on
wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible.
Tyre repair kit 3

Minor damage to the tyre tread or side
wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, can be
repaired using the tyre repair kit (does not
apply to run-flat tyres).
Do not remove the foreign body from the
tyre.
Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or damage
to the wheel rim cannot be repaired with
the tyre repair kit.
9 Warning
Vehicles with insufficient or no tyre
The tyre repair kit is in a compartment 3. Remove the electrical connection cable
pressure can lead to invisible damage to
under the floor cover luggage and air hose from the stowage
the tyre. This damage cannot be repaired
compartment. compartments on the underside of the
with the tyre repair kit. Park the vehicle
1. Take the pouch with the tyre repair kit compressor.
and contact a workshop for assistance.
from the compartment. Carefully remove
Important information, see page 259. the components from the pouch.
In the event of a flat tyre: 2. Remove the compressor.
z Switch on hazard warning lights, apply
handbrake, automatic transmission 3
selector lever in P, manual transmission
or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse
gear.
z Correctly set up the warning triangle 3,
warning triangle, see page 247.
4. Screw the compressor air hose to the 7. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve. 10. Set the rocker switch on the compressor
connection on the sealant bottle. 8. The switch on the compressor must be to I. The tyre is filled with sealant.
5. Fit the sealant bottle into the retainer on set to . 11. While the sealant bottle drains (approx.
the compressor. 9. Connect the compressor plug to the 30 seconds) the pressure indicator on
Set the compressor near the tyre in such accessory socket or cigarette lighter the compressor briefly points to 6 bar.
a way that the sealant bottle is upright. socket. Accessory socket, see page 107. Pressure then sinks again.
6. Remove the valve cap from the defective To avoid discharging the battery, we 12. All of the sealant is pumped into the
tyre. recommend running the engine. tyre. Afterwards, the tyre is filled
with air.
13. The prescribed tyre pressure, see
page 337, should be reached within
10 minutes. Switch off the compressor
when the correct pressure is obtained.
Drain excess tyre pressure with the

button over the pressure indicator.
Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 minutes - see "Important
information" on page 259.
14. Detach the tyre repair kit. Screw the
filler hose to the free connection on the
sealant bottle. This prevents sealant
leakage. Stow the tyre repair kit in the
luggage compartment.
15. Wipe away any sealant spill with a
cloth.
16. Disassemble the warning triangle 3
If the specified tyre pressure is not and store in luggage compartment, see If tyre pressure is more than 1.3 bar,
reached within 10 minutes, remove the page 247. adjust to the prescribed value. Repeat
tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle through the procedure until there is no more
17. The enclosed sticker shows the
one tyre rotation, approx. 2 metres, in pressure loss.
maximum permitted speed at which the
either direction. Reconnect the tyre If the tyre pressure has fallen below
tyre repair may be used. Apply sticker in
repair kit and continue the filling 1.3 bar, the vehicle may no longer be
the drivers field of vision.
process for 10 minutes. If the specified used. Contact a workshop.
tyre pressure is still not reached, the tyre 18. Continue driving immediately to allow
is too badly damaged. Park the vehicle the sealant to distribute evenly 19. Stow the tyre repair kit in the luggage
and contact a workshop. throughout the tyre. Stop after approx. compartment, see page 256.
6 miles/10 km (no more than 10
minutes) and check tyre pressure. Screw
the compressor air hose directly onto
the tyre valve (see Fig. 17256 T).
Important Information The sealant can only be stored for approx. Electrical system
4 years. After this time, the sealing
9 Warning properties can no longer be guaranteed. 9 Warning
Heed the expiration date on the sealant
Do not drive faster than 50 mph bottle. Electronic ignition systems generate very
(80 km/h). high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
The sealant bottle can only be used once.
Do not use the temporary spare wheel for system; high voltage can be fatal.
Replace a used sealant bottle.
a lengthy period. Fuses
The compressor and sealant can be used
Steerability and driving behaviour may from approx. -30 C. The vehicle has two fuseboxes: one behind
be impaired. a cover on the left side of the luggage
Dispose of a used tyre repair kit in
compartment and one in the front left of
accordance with applicable legislation.
The driving comfort of the repaired tyre is the engine compartment.
severely affected, therefore have this tyre The adapters supplied 3 can be used to
replaced. inflate other items e.g. footballs, air 6
mattresses, inflatable dinghies etc.
If the compressor makes abnormal noises
or heats up greatly, switch it off for at least They are located on the underside of the
30 minutes. compressor. To remove, screw on
compressor air hose and withdraw
The integrated safety valve opens at a
adapter.
pressure of 7 bar.
When using the tyre repair set, no
Protect the compressor from moisture and
consumers may be connected to the front
rain.
accessory socket.
We recommend carrying a complete set of Different versions of fuses are used.

fuses. Fuse, Fuse,
Fuse, Fuse, colour rating
Put spare fuses in the provided location in
colour rating Blue 20 A
the fusebox in the luggage compartment.
Open cover, see page 262. Brownish yellow 5A Transparent 25 A
Brown 7.5 A Pink 30 A
Before replacing a fuse, turn off the
respective switch and the ignition. Red 10 A Green 40 A
Blue 15 A
A blown fuse (see figures to the right) can
be recognised by its melted wire. Do not Yellow 20 A
install a new fuse until the cause of the Transparent 25 A
fault has been remedied. Green 30 A
There is a fuse extractor in the luggage Place the fuse extractor on the various Only fit fuses of the specified current
compartment fusebox to facilitate types of fuse from the top or side, and rating. Each fuse has its current rating
replacement of fuses see Fig. 17258 T for withdraw fuse. written on it, in addition the ratings are
an example. colour coded.
Fuses and the most important

circuits they protect
Fusebox in luggage compartment
Depending on the equipment version,
there are two different fuseboxes in the
luggage compartment for differing
electrical circuits.
z Version A see Fig. 18504 T on
page 263.
z Version B see Fig. 17958 T on
page 264.
The Astra TwinTop always has version B.
Spare fuses, fuse extractor, see page 259.
The fusebox is located on the left side of 5-door Hatch, Estate, Van Astra TwinTop
the luggage compartment behind a cover. To open, turn both catches with a coin and To open, pull the two knobs, remove the
Do not store any objects behind the cover. fold cover down. clips and fold the cover upwards.
3-door Hatch
To open, fold the cover upwards.
Fusebox, version B No. Circuit Rating

Some functions are protected by several
fuses. 13 Parking distance sensor 5A
14 Heating, air conditioning 7.5
No. Circuit Rating
system
1 Electric windows, front 25 A
15
2
16 Seat occupancy 5A
3 Instruments 7.5 A recognition,
4 Heating, 5A Open&Start system
air conditioning system, 17 Rain sensor, 5A
climate control system air quality sensor,
5 Airbags 7.5 A tyre pressure monitoring
6 system,
interior mirror
Fusebox, version A 7
Some functions are protected by several 18 Instruments, 5A
8 switches
fuses. To replace a fuse, pull off its
protective cap. 9 19
No. Circuit Rating 10 20 CDC 10 A
1 Fog lights 15 A 11 Heated rear window 25 A 21 Heated exterior mirrors 7.5 A
2 12 Rear screen wiper 15 A 22 Sunroof 20 A
3 Luggage compartment 15 A 23 Electric 25 A
socket windows, rear
4 Reverse lights 7.5 A
5 Electric windows, rear 30 A
6 Air conditioning system 10 A
7 Electric windows, front 30 A
8 Heated exterior mirrors 7.5 A
No. Circuit Rating

38 Central locking system, 25 A
terminal 30
39 Seat heater (left) 15 A
40 Seat heater (right) 15 A
41
42
43
44
No. Circuit Rating No. Circuit Rating

24 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A 32
25 33 Open&Start system 15 A
26 Electrically retractable 7.5 A 34 Sunroof, 25 A
exterior mirrors TwinTop
27 Ultrasonic sensor, 5A 35 Rear socket 15 A
Vauxhall alarm system 36 Towing equipment 20 A
28 37
29 Cigarette lighter, 15 A
front socket
30 Rear socket 15 A
31
Depending on the equipment version, Fuse layout, version A

there are two different fuse layouts for the Some functions are protected by several
engine compartment fusebox, handling fuses.
different electrical circuits:
No. Circuit Rating
z If the luggage compartment fusebox is
version A - see Fig. 18504 T on page 263 1 ABS 20 A
- the fuse layout in the engine 2 ABS 30 A
compartment is version A see next
3 Interior fan climate control 30 A
column.
system
z If the luggage compartment fusebox is 4 Interior fan, heating, 30 A
version B - see Fig. 17958 T on air conditioning system
page 264 - the fuse layout in the engine
compartment is version B - see page 267. 5 Radiator fan 11) 30 A
40 A
The Astra TwinTop always has version B.
Fusebox in engine compartment
The fusebox is at the front left side of the Spare fuses, fuse extractor, see page 259.
engine compartment.
9 Warning
Turn off engine before opening engine
compartment fusebox; risk of injury, see
page 297.
To open the cover, release the catch by

inserting a screwdriver into the opening as
far as it will go and swivelling it to the side.
Open the cover upwards and remove.
1)
Different ratings depending on engine
and equipment level.
No. Circuit Rating

21 Engine electronics 20 A
22 Engine electronics 7.5 A
23 Headlight range 5A
adjustment
24 Fuel pump 15 A
25
26 Engine electronics 10 A
27 Heating, 7.5 A
air conditioning system,
air quality sensor
28
29 Power steering 5A
6 Radiator fan 21) 20 A 14 Windscreen wiper 30 A
30 A 30 Engine electronics 10 A
15 Windscreen wiper 30 A
40 A 31 Rear screen wiper 15 A
16 Horn, ABS, 5A
7 Central locking system 20 A brake light switch, 32 Brake light switch 5A
8 Windscreen wash system, 10 A air conditioning system 33 Headlight range 5A
tailgate 17 Diesel filter or 25 A adjustment,
9 Heated rear window, 30 A air conditioning system 20 A light switch, clutch switch,
heated exterior mirrors instrument assembly,
18 Starter 25 A drivers door module
10 Diagnostics plug 7.5 A 19 34 Control unit, 7.5 A
11 Instruments 7.5 A 20 Horn 15 A steering column module
12 Mobile telephone, 7.5 A 35 Infotainment system 20 A
digital radio,
Twin Audio, 36 Cigarette lighter, 15 A
display front socket
13 Courtesy light 5A
1)
Fuse layout, version B No. Circuit Rating No. Circuit Rating

Some functions are protected by several
fuses. 7 Windscreen wash system 10 A 16 Electronics control units, 5A
8 Horn 15 A Open&Start system,
No. Circuit Rating ABS,
9 Headlight wash system 25 A brake light switch,
1 ABS 20 A
10 TwinTop
2 ABS 30 A
11 17 Diesel filter heating 25 A
3 Interior fan climate control 30 A
system 12 18 Starter 25 A
4 Interior fan, heating, 30 A 13 Fog lights 15 A 19 Transmission electronics 30 A
air conditioning system 14 Windscreen wiper 30 A 20 Air conditioning system 10 A
5 Radiator fan 11) 30 A 15 Windscreen wiper 30 A 21 Engine electronics 20 A
40 A
22 Engine electronics 7.5 A
6 Radiator fan 21) 20 A
23 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 10 A
30 A
headlight range adjustment
40 A
1)

24 Fuel pump 15 A 31 Adaptive Forward 10 A
25 Transmission electronics 15 A Lighting,
headlight range
26 Engine electronics 10 A adjustment
27 Power steering 5A 32 Brake system, 5A
28 Transmission electronics 5A air conditioning system,
29 Transmission electronics 7.5 A clutch switch
30 Engine electronics 10 A 33 Adaptive Forward 5A
Lighting,
headlight range
adjustment,
light switch
34 Control unit, 7.5 A
steering column module
35 Infotainment system 20 A
36 Mobile telephone, 7.5 A
digital radio,
Twin Audio,
display
Bulb replacement
Before replacing a bulb, switch ignition off
and turn appropriate switch off.
Only hold new bulb at base! Do not touch
the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise
fingerprints on the glass evaporate.
Residue builds up on the reflector
eventually resulting in a dull reflector.
Inadvertently stained bulbs may be
cleaned with a clean lint-free cloth, using
alcohol or white spirits.
The replacement bulb must be in
accordance with the data on the base of
the defective bulb. Do not exceed wattage
given on bulb base.
The bulbs of the front outer lights are Halogen headlight system
replaced through openings in the front Headlights with separate systems for main
wheel arches: turn appropriate wheels to beam 1 (inner bulbs) and dipped beam 2
gain access, release catch and remove (outer bulbs).
cover.
Headlight aiming
We recommend that headlight adjustment
be carried out by a workshop, who will
have special equipment.
On headlight adjustment, the manual
headlight range adjustment 3 must be set
to 0.
Dipped beam 3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage. 4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from
1. Replace bulb through the opening in the the reflector.
front wheel arch: turn appropriate wheel
to gain access, release catch and
remove cover, see page 269.
2. Remove headlight protective cover.
5. Detach bulb from bulb holder. Main beam 5. Disengage spring clip from retainer by
6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder, 1. Open bonnet and engage support. pressing forward and then swing
without touching the glass. downward.
2. Replace bulbs from engine
7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on compartment out. 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing.
the bulb holder engage in the recesses To replace the bulb on the right-hand 7. When fitting a new bulb, engage the
in the reflector. side, remove the air hose from the air lugs in the recesses on the reflector
8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as it filter. without touching the glass.
will go. To replace the bulb on the left-hand
9. Place headlight protective cover in side, remove the plug from the fusebox.
position and close. 3. Remove headlight protective cover.
10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch 4. Detach plug connector from bulb.
and engage.
8. Engage spring wire clip, plug connector

onto bulb.
9. Place headlight protective cover in
position and close.
After bulb replacement on the right-
hand side, re-attach air hose to air filter
and engage.
After bulb replacement on the left-
hand side, reconnect the fusebox plug
and engage.
Parking lights 4. Remove parking light socket from

1. Open bonnet and engage support. reflector.
2. Replace bulbs from engine compartment

out.
To replace the bulb on the right-hand
side, remove the air hose from the air
filter.
To replace the bulb on the left-hand
side, remove the plug from the fusebox.
3. Remove main beam headlight protective
cover.
5. Remove bulb from socket. Xenon headlight system 3, Main beam

6. Insert new bulb, without touching the Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 1. Replace bulb through the opening in the
glass. system 3 front wheel arch: turn appropriate wheel
7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight Headlights with separate systems for to gain access, release catch and
protective cap in position and close. dipped beam 1 (inner bulbs) and main remove cover, see page 269.
beam 2 (outer bulbs). 2. Remove headlight protective cover.
After bulb replacement on the right-
hand side, re-attach air hose to air filter Dipped beam
and engage.
9 Warning
After bulb replacement on the left-hand
side, reconnect the fusebox plug and Dipped beam works with a very high
engage. electrical voltage. Do not touch, risk of
injury. Have a workshop replace the bulb.
3. Rotate left bulb holder and disengage. 4. Remove the bulb holder with bulb from 5. Detach bulb from bulb holder.
the reflector. 6. Insert new bulb into bulb holder,
without touching the glass.
7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on
the bulb holder engage in the recesses
in the reflector.
8. Rotate bulb holder to right as far as it
will go.
9. Place headlight protective cover in
position and close.
10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
and engage.
Parking lights 4. Remove parking light socket from 5. Remove bulb from socket.
1. Open bonnet and engage support. reflector. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the
2. Replace bulb through the opening in the glass.
front wheel arch: turn appropriate wheel 7. Insert holder in reflector. Place headlight
to gain access, release catch and protective cap in position and close.
remove cover, see page 269. 8. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
3. Remove main beam headlight protective and engage.
cover.
6. Insert light holder in reflector, rotate

clockwise and engage in position.
7. Position cover on opening in wheel arch
and engage.
Side turn signal lights

Have the bulb changed by a workshop.
Fog lights 3
Front turn signal lights 4. Push bulb into socket slightly, rotate left
1. Open bonnet and engage support. and remove.
2. Replace bulb through the opening in the 5. Insert new bulb, without touching the
front wheel arch: turn appropriate wheel glass.
to gain access, release catch and
remove cover, see page 269.
3. Rotate bulb holder to left and
disengage.
Tail lights 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear.
Hatch 5-door 3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen
1. To replace bulbs on the right side, use a fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3
coin to open the lock as indicated in the and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt
Fig. and fold the cover down. wrench 3, see vehicle tools on page 251.
To replace bulbs on the left side, use a
coin to turn both locks (see Fig. 17261 T
on page 262) and fold the cover down.
6. Remove bulb from socket.

7. Insert new bulb, without touching the
glass.
8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing,
ensuring that it properly engages. Insert
three screws with washers and tighten as
far as possible.
5. Unscrew three screws using a screwdriver Bulbs in bulb carrier:

(vehicle tools, see page 251). Press 1 = Reversing light
locking tabs on outside of bulb holder
inward and remove the bulb holder. 2 = Flasher
3 = Reversing light/brake light
4 = Reversing light
5 = Fog tail light (country-specific
version: fog tail light on left side
only. The bulb on the right side
can be used as a spare)
11. Carry out the following steps to ensure

proper function of the tail lights:
Switch on ignition
Operate brake
Switch on parking lights
9. Ensure that the seals are applied to the 10. Insert the bulb housing in the body,
bulb holder and fixing screws. engaging the lug and the ball pin in the
recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts
using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the
plug connector. Close and engage the
flap.
Hatch 3-door 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Detach bulb housing towards the rear.
1. To replace bulbs, fold the cover down. 3. Hold outside of bulb housing, loosen
fastening nuts with wheel bolt wrench 3
and unscrew by hand. Wheel bolt
wrench 3, see vehicle tools on page 251.

glass.
8. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing,
ensuring that it properly engages.
5. Remove the round seal from the Bulbs in bulb carrier:

fastening bolt. Press the locking tabs on 1 = Reversing light
the outside of the bulb holder outward
and remove the bulb holder. 2 = Flasher
3 = Reversing light/brake light
4 = Reversing light

Switch on ignition
Operate brake
9. Ensure that the seals are applied to the 10. Insert the bulb housing in the body,
bulb holder and fixing screws. engaging the lug and the ball pin in the
recesses. Tighten the fastening nuts
using a wheel bolt wrench 3. Attach the
plug connector. Close and engage the
flap.
Estate, Van 2. Detach plug connector from bulb holder. 4. Unscrew the three screws with a
1. Disengage cover by pressing retaining 3. Hold the outside of the bulb housing, screwdriver (vehicle tools, see page 251)
lugs and remove. unscrew the three fastening nuts and and remove the bulb holder.
remove the bulb housing rearwards.
6. Insert new bulb without touching the

glass. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing
and screw in place. Insert bulb housing
into body and tighten fastening nuts by
hand. Attach plug connector. Close and
lock cover.
Switch on ignition
Operate brake
Bulbs in bulb carrier: Astra TwinTop

1 = Reversing light/brake light 1. Unscrew retaining nuts.
2 = Flasher
3 = Reversing light
2. Remove bulb housing from outside. 4. Disengage sockets by turning and Bulbs in bulb carrier:
Disengage plug by pressing on flap and remove. Press locking tabs on the long 1 = Reversing light/brake light
remove from bulb holder. sides of the bulb holder outwards; lift
bulb holder at front end (arrow) and 2 = Reversing light
3. Detach seal from bulb holder. 3 = Fog tail light (country-specific
remove.
design: fog tail light on left-side
4 = Reversing light
5 = Flasher

glass.
7. Insert bulb holder in bulb housing by first
inserting the lug at the front of the plug.
Fold together bulb holder, ensuring that
it engages properly. Insert sockets and
engage by turning.
8. Fit seal on bulb holder as illustrated. Number plate light

Ensure that the seal is flat in the area of 1. Insert screwdriver vertically in bulb insert
the screws. as illustrated in figure. Press to the side
9. Engage plug. Insert light housing in and release spring.
body, ensuring proper positioning of
the ball pins in the recesses. Tighten the
retaining nuts.
Switch on ignition
Operate brake
Switch on parking lights.
2. Remove bulb housing downward, taking 4. Rotate bulb socket anti-clockwise and Courtesy lights
care not to pull on the cable. disengage. Front courtesy light, reading lights 3
3. Lift flap and disconnect plug from bulb 5. Remove bulb from socket. To ensure that no power is supplied to the
socket. lights, close the doors before removing.
glass. 1. Disengage lens by hand at location
illustrated in figure, press it downward
7. Insert bulb holder into bulb housing and
slightly and remove at a downward
engage by turning it clockwise.
angle.
8. Connect plug to bulb socket.
9. Insert and engage bulb housing.
glass.
4. Mount lens and engage in position.
Rear courtesy lights 3,

rear reading lights 3
Glove compartment lighting, 2. Press bulb slightly towards spring clip

luggage compartment lighting, and remove.
footwell lighting 3 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the
To ensure that no power is supplied to the glass.
lights, close the doors or hold the contact
switch depressed before removing. 4. Insert light in opening and engage in
position.
1. Prise the light out with a screwdriver.
Instrument illumination,
information display illumination 3
Vehicle care Vehicle care aids 3 Washing

When caring for your vehicle, observe all Vehicle wash: The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to
national environmental regulations, z Wash brush environmental influences, e.g. continuous
particularly when washing it. z Car Shampoo changes in weather conditions, industrial
z Sponge waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so
Regular, thorough care helps to improve z Chamois Leather wash and wax your vehicle regularly. When
the appearance of your vehicle and z Engine Cleaner using automatic car washes, select a
maintain its value over the years. It is also z Glass Cleaner programme which includes waxing.
prerequisite for warranty claims for any
paint or corrosion damage. The following Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen
pages contain tips for vehicle care which, if and the like should be cleaned off
used properly, will help combat the Vehicle care: immediately, as they contain aggressive
unavoidable, damaging effects of the z Paintwork Cleaner constituents which can cause paint
environment. z Car Polish/Colour Restorer damage.
z Car Wax/Sealer If using a car wash, comply with the
z Metallic Paintwork Wax relevant instructions of the car wash
z Touch-up Applicator manufacturer. The windscreen wiper and
z Aerosol and Touch-up Paint rear screen wiper must be switched off, see
z Wheel Preserver pages 12, 13, 141. Remove antenna 3 and
z Insect Remover roof rack 3. Stand on the door sill to reach
z Window Cleaner them more easily.
z Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent
z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals If you wash your vehicle by hand, make
z De-icer sure that the insides of the wings are also
thoroughly rinsed out.
Clean edges and folds on opened doors Polishing Paintwork damage

and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Polishing is necessary only if the paint has Repair minor paintwork damage such as
Thoroughly rinse off and leather-off the become dull or if solid deposits have stone chips, scratches etc. immediately
vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use become attached to it. using the touch-up pen or spray before rust
separate leathers for paint and window Paintwork polish with silicone forms a forms. If rust has already formed, have a
surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows protective film, making waxing workshop eliminate the cause. Also check
will impair vision. unnecessary. the surfaces and edges facing the road
surface on which rust may have developed
Observe national regulations. Plastic body parts should not be treated unnoticed for some time.
Waxing with wax and polish.
Exterior lights
Wax your vehicle regularly, in particular Use Metallic Paintwork Wax on vehicles Headlight and other protective light bezels
after it has been washed using shampoo with a metallic-effect paint finish. are made of plastic. If they require
and at the latest when water no longer Sunroof 3 additional cleaning after the vehicle has
forms beads on the paintwork, otherwise Never clean with solvents or abrasive been washed, clean them with Car
the paintwork will dry out. agents, fuels, aggressive media (e.g. paint Shampoo. Do not use any abrasive or
Also wax edges and folds on opened doors cleaner, acetone-containing solutions etc.), caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper,
and flaps as well as the areas they cover. acidic or highly alkaline media or abrasive and do not clean them dry.
pads.
No stickers may be applied to the sunroof.
Wheels
Use a pH-neutral wheel cleaning agent to
clean the wheels.
Wheels are painted and can be treated
with the same agents as the body. For alloy
wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel
Preserver.
Plastic and rubber parts Open Velcro fasteners on clothing could Windscreen wiper blades
For additional cleaning of plastic and damage seat upholstery. Make sure Velcro Wax, such as that used in car washes, can
rubber parts use Cleaner. Do not use any fasteners are closed. cause streaks to form on the windscreen
other agent, and in particular do not use Seat belts when the wiper is used.
solvents or petrol. Always keep seat belts clean and dry. Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. Clean only with lukewarm water or Cleaner. a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen
Wheels and tyres Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessary,
Windows see page 303.
Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. When cleaning the heated rear window,
Interior and upholstery make sure that the heating element on the Locks
Clean the vehicle interior, including the inside of the window is not damaged. The locks are factory-lubricated with a high
instrument panel fascia, using interior quality lock cylinder grease. This prevents
Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather the locks from freezing. Only use de-icer in
cleaner. in conjunction with Window Cleaner and urgent cases as this destroys the grease
The instrument panel should only be Insect Remover. and damages the function of the locks.
cleaned using a soft damp cloth. Windscreen Wash Solvent is suitable for de- After using de-icer, have a workshop
Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum icing windows. regrease the locks.
cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use For mechanical removal of ice, use a
cleaner that is suitable for both fabrics and commercially available sharp-edged ice
vinyl. scraper. Press the scraper firmly against
Do not use cleaning agents such as the glass so that no dirt can get under it
acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, paint and scratch the glass.
remover, nail varnish remover, washing
powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable.
Engine compartment Engine washing also removes subsequently Underbody

Areas of the engine compartment that are applied protective wax. Therefore after PVC underbody protection is applied in the
painted in the same colour as the vehicle washing, have a workshop protect the factory in the areas that are affected by
must be looked after like any other painted engine, parts of the braking system in the wheel spray, including the longitudinal
surface. engine bay, axle elements with steering, sides of the underbody. This provides long-
It is advisable to wash the engine body elements and cavities, thoroughly term protection and does not require
compartment before and after winter and with protective wax. special maintenance.
preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and An engine wash can be performed in the The areas of the vehicle underbody that
brake fluid reservoir with plastic sheets spring in order to remove dirt that has are not covered with PVC have a
before washing the engine. adhered to the engine compartment, permanent protective wax coating in
When washing the engine with a steam-jet which may also have a high salt content. critical areas.
cleaner, do not direct the steam jet at Check protective wax layer and make good On vehicles which are washed frequently in
components of the anti-lock brake system, if necessary. automatic car washes with underbody
the air conditioning system, the climate Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners. washing facility, the protective wax
control system or the belt drive and its coating may be impaired by dirt-dissolving
components. additives.
Check the underbody after washing and Astra TwinTop

have it waxed if necessary. Before the start Treat all seals, e. g. on the roof and
of the cold weather season, check the PVC windscreen frame, with silicone oil from
coating and protective wax coating. Have time to time. Good contact between the
them restored to perfect condition if fine rubber lips and the sealing surfaces
necessary. prevents leaks and reduces clamping
Caution commercially available bitumen/ forces.
rubber materials can damage the PVC The roof can be held in an intermediate
coating. We recommend that you have position for about 9 minutes by releasing
underbody work carried out by a the operating switch in order to clean roof
workshop, who knows the prescribed spaces.
materials and has experience in the use Intermediate roof position for cleaning
thereof. see page 58.
The underbody should be washed Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.
following the end of the cold weather
season to remove any dirt adhering to the
underbody since this may also contain salt.
Check protective wax coating and, if
necessary, have it restored to perfect
condition.
294 Service, maintenance
Service, maintenance In our experience, the most common cause

of all complaints is the result of
large investment in his business and is
proud of his reputation and
misunderstanding or lack of professionalism and fully realises that
communication between the customer and satisfied customers are his key to success.
the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. In the unlikely event that you are still not
We sincerely hope you will never have happy with the answer your Vauxhall
cause to complain about your vehicle. Authorised Repairer has given, or the
However, if things do go wrong, the best action he proposes to correct the problem,
course of action for you to take is to you may contact the Customer Care
contact your Vauxhall Authorised Department1) where a team of Customer
Repairers Service Reception Staff and Care Consultants will spare no effort to
explain the difficulty you are having. We ensure your complete satisfaction.
are confident they will do their utmost to Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
resolve the problem to your complete Customer Care,
Service, maintenance .......................... 294
satisfaction. Griffin House,
Inspection system ................................ 296
Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Sometimes, however, despite the best of Osborne Road
Accessories ........................................ 297 intentions of all concerned, LUTON,
A note on safety .................................. 297 misunderstandings can occur. If your Beds., LU1 3YT
problem has not been resolved to your Telephone: 0845 090 2044
Checking and topping up fluids ......... 298
satisfaction, please make an appointment They will review all the facts involved. Then
Engine oil .............................................. 298
to discuss the matter with the Manager of if it is felt some further action can be taken,
Diesel fuel filter .................................... 300 the department concerned.
Coolant ................................................. 300 the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will be
The majority of areas of concern can be advised accordingly. In any case, your
Brake fluid ............................................ 302
quickly resolved in this way. contact will be acknowledged confirming
Windscreen wiper ................................ 303
Should you wish to pursue the matter Vauxhall Motors position in the matter.
Windscreen and headlight wash
systems 3........................................... 305 further, the Principal of the Vauxhall If you are not satisfied with the outcome,
Battery .................................................. 306 Authorised Repairer should be made you can if you wish, seek advice from an
aware of your concern. It is advisable in independent third party such as:
Protecting electronic components ..... 306
cases such as this to write to him to confirm Automobile Association (A.A.)
Vehicle decommissioning.................... 307 your problem and the solutions that have
Vehicle recommissioning..................... 307 Fanum House, Basing View,
been offered. BASINGSTOKE,
You can be assured the Authorised Hants., RG21 4EA
Repairers Principal will only be too anxious
to fully investigate your problems and
correct any errors made. After all, he has a 1)
Calls may be monitored and recorded for
training purposes.
Service, maintenance 295
Royal Automobile Club (R.A.C.), General Motors Belgium N.V. General Motors Hellas S.A.
R.A.C. Motoring Services Ltd.. Noordelaan 401 - Haven 500 56 Kifisias Avenue & Delfon str.
89-91 Pall Mall, 2030 Antwerp Belgium Amarousion
LONDON, SW1Y 5HS Tel. 00 32-34 50 63 29 151 25 Athens Greece
The Customer Relations Department, General Motors Southeast Europe Tel. 00 30-1-6 80 65 01
Society of Motor Manufacturers and org. sloka General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd.
Traders Ltd. (S.M.M.T.), Olbrachtova 9 Szabadsag utca 117
Forbes House, Halkin Street, 140 00 Prague Czech Republic 2040 Budars Hungary
LONDON, SW1X 7DS Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321 Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
Customer Complaints Service, General Motors Danmark General Motors India
Scottish Motor Trade Association, Jaegersborg Alle 4 Sixth Floor, Tower A
(S.M.T.A.), 2920 Charlottenlund Denmark Global Business Park
3 Palmerston Place, Tel. 00 45-39 97 85 00 Mehrauli Gurgaon Road
EDINBURGH, EH12 5AQ Vauxhall Motors Ltd. Gurgaon 122 022, Haryana India
The National Conciliation Service, Customer Care Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333
Retail Motor Industry Federation, Griffin House, Osborne Road General Motors Ireland Ltd.
9 North Street, Luton, Bedfordshire, LU1 3YT England Opel House, Unit 60, Heather Road
RUBGY, CV21 2AB Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044 Sandyford, Dublin 18 Ireland
If you have a problem whilst abroad: General Motors Finland Oy Tel. 00 353 1-216 10 00
The Service Departments of ADAM OPEL Pajuniityntie 5 General Motors Italia Srl
GmbH and General Motors branches 00320 Helsinki Finland Piazzale dellIndustria 40
everywhere will provide information and Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47 00144 Rome Italy
assistance: General Motors France Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51
In Luxembourg please contact the 1 9, avenue du Marais General Motors Nederland B.V.
General Motors Service Department in Angle Quai de Bezons Lage Mosten 49 63
Antwerp Belgium 95101 Argenteuil Cedex France 4822 NK Breda Netherlands
Telephone: 00 32-34 50 63 29 Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51 Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00
General Motors Austria GmbH ADAM OPEL GmbH General Motors Norge AS
Gro-Enzersdorfer Str. 59 Bahnhofsplatz 1 Kjeller-Vest 6
1220 Vienna Austria 65423 Rsselsheim Germany 2027 Kjeller Norway
Tel. 00 43-1-2 88 77 444 or Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04
00 43-1-2 88 77 0 00 49-61 42-7 70 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o.
Wooska 5
06-675 Warsaw Poland
Telephone 00 48-22-606 17 00
General Motors Portugal The service interval display takes account

Quinta da Fonte of off-the-road periods during which the
Edifico Ferno Magalhes, Piso 2 battery is disconnected.
2780-190 Pao dArcos Portugal For vehicles with flexible engine oil change
Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00 and service intervals, the length of these
General Motors Southeast Europe intervals is based on several parameters
org. zloka stemming from usage. For this reason,
Apollo Business Centre various engine-specific data is continually
Mlynsk Nivy 45 gathered and is used to calculate the
821 09 Bratislava - Slovakia remaining distance until the next service.
Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543 This remaining distance can be displayed
General Motors Espaa S.L. with the ignition off: briefly press the trip
Paseo de la Castellana, 91 odometer reset button, the mileage
28046 Madrid Spain reading shows. Press the button again for
Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 Inspection system around 2 seconds, InSP and the remaining
General Motors Norden AB In order to guarantee economical and safe distance is shown.
rstangvgen 17 vehicle operation and to maintain the If the remaining distance is less than
100 73 Stockholm Sweden value of your vehicle, it is of vital 1000 miles (1500 km), InSP is displayed
Tel. 00 46-20 333 000 importance that all maintenance work is with a remaining distance of 600 miles
carried out at the proper intervals as (1000 km) when the ignition is switched on
General Motors Suisse S.A. specified.
Stelzenstrae 4 and off. InSP is displayed for several
8152 Glattbrugg Switzerland In vehicles with a fixed engine oil change seconds if the remaining distance is less
Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 and service interval, InSP appears in the than 600 miles (1000 km). Have the service
odometer display when the ignition is work that is due carried out within one
General Motors Trkiye Ltd. Sti. switched on when the service work is due: week or 300 miles (500 km). Have this work
Kemalpasa yolu zeri have the relevant service work carried out carried out by a Vauxhall Authorised
35861 Torbali / Izmir Turkey by a workshop within one week or 300 miles repairer in order to avoid invalidation of
Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 (500 km). warranty claims.
In Albania, Bosnia-Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Croatia, Estonia, Latvia,
Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania,
Serbia-Montenegro and Slovenia
please contact the
General Motors Service Department in
Budars Hungary
Tel. 00 36-23 446 100
Further information on maintenance and Genuine Vauxhall Parts and

the inspection system can be found in the Accessories
service booklet, which is in the glove We recommend that you use "Genuine
compartment. Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and
Have service work and repairs to the conversion parts expressly approved for
bodywork and components performed your vehicle type. These parts have
properly by a workshop. We recommend undergone special tests to establish their
your Vauxhall Authorised repairer, who has reliability, safety and specific suitability for
excellent knowledge of Vauxhall vehicles Vauxhall vehicles. Despite continuous
and is in possession of the necessary tools market monitoring, we cannot assess or
and current service instructions from guarantee these attributes for other
Vauxhall. To exclude the possibility of loss products, even if they have been granted
of warranty, use of a Vauxhall Authorised approval by the relevant authorities or in
repairer is recommended in particular some other form.
during the warranty period. For further "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" A note on safety
information see the Service Booklet. and conversion parts approved by To avoid injury from moving parts and
Separate anti-corrosion service Vauxhall can be obtained from your cables conducting ignition voltage, only
Have the work performed by a workshop at Vauxhall Authorised repairer, who can carry out engine compartment checks
the intervals specified in the Service provide comprehensive advice about (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil
Booklet. permissible technical changes and ensure level) when the ignition is switched off.
that the part is installed correctly.
9 Warning
The cooling fan is controlled by a
thermoswitch and can therefore start
unexpectedly even if the ignition is
switched off. Risk of injury.
Electronic ignition systems generate very
high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
system; high voltage can be fatal.
Never carry out any repairs or adjustment Engine oil In vehicles with engine oil level monitoring 3
and maintenance work on the vehicle Information on engine oils is found in the the engine oil level is monitored
yourself. This especially applies to the Service Booklet. automatically1), see page 116. It is
engine, chassis and safety parts. You may advisable to check the engine oil level
unwittingly infringe the provisions of the Engine oil level and consumption before setting off on long journeys.
law and, by not performing the work Every engine consumes engine oil for
properly, endanger yourself and other technical reasons. The engine oil
road users. consumption cannot be assessed until a
fairly long distance has been driven, and
Checking and topping up fluids may be above the specified value when the
vehicle is first being driven (run-in period).
The caps that are used when topping up
Frequent driving at high revs increases
engine oil, coolant and wash fluid as well
engine oil consumption.
as the oil dipstick may be coloured yellow
to aid identification.
9 Warning
Do not allow the engine oil level to drop
below the minimum level!
1)
Not on Z 14 XEP or Z 20 LEH engine.
Sales designation see pages 310, 311.
Checking the engine oil level, topping up To check the engine oil level, wipe the oil Top up with the same brand of engine oil
engine oil from dipstick and insert dipstick into that was used during the previous oil
The pictures show the inspection of a petrol handle as far as it will go. Top engine oil up change, following the instructions in the
and two diesel engines. if the level has dropped into the range of service booklet.
The oil level must be checked with the the top-up mark MIN. To close, position the cap and screw it into
vehicle on a level surface and with the The engine oil level must not exceed the place.
engine (which must be at operating upper mark MAX on the dipstick. Excess Capacities, see pages 346, 347.
temperature) switched off. Wait at least engine oil must be drained off or extracted.
5 minutes before checking the level to If the engine oil level is above the MAX
allow the normal engine oil accumulation mark there is a risk of damage to the
in the engine to drain into the oil pan. engine or the catalytic converter.
Capacity between MIN and MAX marks,
9 Warning see pages 346, 347.
It is the owners responsibility to maintain
the correct level of an appropriate quality
oil in the engine.
Diesel fuel filter Coolant

On each engine oil change, have the fuel The glycol-based coolant provides
filter checked for any water residue by a excellent corrosion protection for the
workshop. heating and cooling systems as well as
Illumination of A indicates water in the antifreeze protection down to around
fuel filter 3. -28 C. It remains in the cooling system
throughout the year and need not be
Have fuel filter checked at shorter intervals changed.
if the vehicle is subjected to extreme
operating conditions such as high humidity Use of certain antifreezes can lead to
(primarily in coastal areas), extremely high engine damage. We therefore recommend
or low outside temperatures and that you only use antifreezes that have
substantially varying daytime and been approved.
night-time temperatures.
9 Warning
Engine oil change, oil filter change
Have a workshop change the oil at the Antifreeze is a danger to health; it must
specified service intervals. therefore be kept in the original container
We recommend that you use genuine and out of the reach of children.
engine oil filters.
9 Warning
Empty engine oil cans do not belong in
the domestic rubbish. Please comply with
the legal, environmental and health
regulations as regards the disposal of
used oil and engine oil filters.
When the engine is at operating

temperature, coolant level rises. It falls
again when the system cools. If it falls
below the KALT/COLD mark when the
system is cold, top up to just above the
mark.
Top up antifreeze. If no antifreeze is
available, top up with clean tap water. If
tap water is unavailable, distilled water
can be used.
After topping up with water or distilled
water, check the antifreeze concentration
and add antifreeze if necessary. Have a
workshop eliminate the cause of the
Antifreeze and corrosion protection Coolant level coolant loss.
Before the start of winter, have a workshop Hardly any losses occur since the cooling
check the antifreeze protection. The system is sealed and it is thus rarely Too low a coolant level can cause engine
antifreeze level must guarantee protection necessary to top up the coolant. damage.
to approx. -28 C. Insufficient antifreeze The coolant should be a little above the To close, position the cap and screw it into
will reduce the frost protection level and KALT/COLD mark in the expansion tank place.
the corrosion protection. If necessary add with a cold cooling system. The coolant
antifreeze. level can also be read off from the outside
If coolant loss is topped up with water, of the expansion tank.
have concentration checked and add
antifreeze if necessary. 9 Warning
Allow engine to cool down before
removing coolant filler cap. Remove filler
cap carefully so that pressure can escape
slowly, otherwise there is a risk of
scalding.
Coolant temperature The use of certain brake fluids can cause

Control indicator W illuminates when damage or loss of braking power. We
coolant temperature is too high. Check therefore recommend the use of high-
coolant level immediately: performance brake fluid that has been
z Coolant level too low: approved.
Add coolant, see notes under "Antifreeze When topping up, ensure maximum
and corrosion protection", and "Coolant cleanliness as contamination of the brake
level". Have a workshop eliminate the fluid can lead to function problems in the
cause of the coolant loss. braking system.
z Coolant level OK: After correcting the brake fluid level, have
Have the cause of the raised coolant a workshop eliminate the cause of the
temperature eliminated. Contact a brake fluid loss.
workshop.
Brake fluid
Brake fluid level
9 Warning
Brake fluid is toxic and caustic. Keep
away from eyes, skin, textiles and
painted surfaces. Direct contact can
cause injuries and damage.
The fluid level in the reservoir must be

neither higher than the MAX mark nor
lower than the MIN mark.
Brake fluid change Windscreen wiper We recommend releasing frozen wiper

Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it absorbs Clear vision is essential for safe driving. blades with defroster spray.
water. If the brakes become hot, such as Smearing wiper blades can be cleaned with
when driving on long downhill stretches, Perform regular checks on the windscreen
wiper and headlight wash system 3 to a soft cloth and Vauxhall Windscreen
vapour bubbles can occur in the water, Wash Solvent.
which can have an extremely adverse ensure they are operating correctly. We
effect on braking power (depending on the recommend wiper blade replacement at Wiper blades whose lips have become
proportion of water). least once a year. hardened, cracked or covered with silicone
If the windscreen is dirty, operate the must be replaced. This may be necessary
The fluid change intervals specified in the as a result of the effects of ice, thawing salt
Service Booklet must therefore be windscreen wash system before switching
on the windscreen wiper or setting the or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning
observed. agents.
wiper to automatic operation with the rain
9 Warning sensor 3. This will avoid wiper blade wear. Switch off the windscreen wiper or
Do not switch on the windscreen wiper or automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in car
Have the brake fluid change performed set them to automatic operation with the wash, see pages 12, 13, 141, 289.
by a workshop. Please comply with the rain sensor 3 if the windscreen is iced up as Windscreen wiper care, see page 291.
legal, environmental and health this could damage the wiper blades or the
regulations as regards the disposal of wiper system.
brake fluid.
To ensure proper operation of the rain Service setting for front windscreen wiper Wiper blades on the windscreen
sensor 3 the sensor area must be free from (e.g. for changing or cleaning the front Activate service setting see previous
dust, dirt and ice, which is why the wiper blades). column. Raise wiper arm, tilt wiper blade
windscreen wash system must be operated Within 4 seconds from turning off the at 90 to the wiper arm and remove to the
at regular intervals and the sensor area ignition, with the key still in the lock 3 or for side.
de-iced. Vehicles with rain sensor 3 can be the Open&Start System 3 after switching
identified by the sensor area near the top off the ignition and before opening the
of the windscreen. drivers door, move the wiper stalk down.
Release wiper stalk as soon as the wiper is
vertical.
The windscreen wash system and

headlight wash system will not freeze in
winter:
Frost protection Mixing ratio of

down to Vauxhall
Windscreen
Wash Solvent to
water
-5 C 1:3
-10 C 1:2
-20 C 1:1
-30 C 2:1
Wiper blade on the rear window 3 Windscreen and headlight wash When closing the reservoir, press the lid
Lift wiper arm. Disengage wiper blade as systems 3 firmly over the beaded edge all the way
shown in Fig. 17318 T, and remove. The fluid reservoir filler neck for the round.
windscreen wash system and headlight
wash system 3 is located at the front, next
to the left headlight.
Capacities, see pages 346, 347.
Fill only with clean water to prevent the
nozzles from clogging. To improve
cleaning efficiency, we recommend that
you add a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash
Solvent.
Parking the vehicle for more than 4 weeks Protecting electronic components
can lead to battery discharging. This may In order to prevent faults in electronic
reduce the service life of the battery. components in the electrical system, never
Disconnect battery from on-board power connect or disconnect battery with engine
supply by disconnecting the negative running or ignition switched on. Never start
terminal. engine with battery disconnected, e.g.
The Vauxhall alarm system 3 siren must be when starting using jump leads.
deactivated as follows: switch the ignition To avoid damaging the vehicle, do not
on then off, disconnect the vehicles make any modifications to the electrical
battery within 15 seconds. system, e.g. connecting additional
Ensure that ignition is switched off before consumers or tampering with electronic
connecting battery. Then perform the control units (chip tuning).
following actions:
z Setting date and time in the information
9 Warning
Battery display, see pages 124, 127, 132.
The battery is maintenance-free. Electronic ignition systems generate very
z If necessary activate the window and high voltages. Do not touch the ignition
9 Warning sunroof electronics 3, see pages 51, 54. system; high voltage can be fatal.
In order to prevent the battery from
Have the battery change performed by a discharging, some consumers such as the
workshop. Please comply with the legal, courtesy light automatically switch off
environmental and health regulations as after approx. 20 minutes.
regards the disposal of old batteries.
Disconnecting/connecting the battery
Fitting of electrical or electronic accessories from/to the electrical system
at a later date can discharge or add extra Before charging, isolate the battery from
load to the battery. Take advice on the the on-board network. First remove the
technical possibilities, e.g. use of a more negative and then the positive terminal.
powerful battery. Do not reverse the polarity of the battery,
i.e. the terminals for the positive and
negative leads. When connecting, start
with the positive lead and then connect the
negative lead.
Vehicle decommissioning Vehicle storage Vehicle recommissioning

Observe national regulations. z Park vehicle in dry, well ventilated place. Observe national regulations.
With manual transmission or
If the vehicle is to be parked for several Easytronic 3, engage 1st or reverse Perform the following work before
months, to avoid damage have the gear. With automatic transmission 3, recommissioning the vehicle:
following work performed by a workshop. move selector lever to P. Use chocks or z Connect battery, see page 306.
z Wash and preserve the vehicle, see the like to prevent the vehicle from
rolling. z Check tyre pressure and correct if
page 289. necessary, see page 337.
z Check corrosion protection in engine z Do not apply handbrake.
z Fill up windscreen wash system, see
compartment and on underbody and z Disconnect battery by disengaging page 305.
repair if necessary. negative terminal from vehicle electrical
system, see page 306. z Check engine oil level, see page 298.
z Clean and wax the rubber seals of the
bonnet, doors and roof. Intermediate z Check the coolant level; top up with
position of the Astra TwinTop roof for antifreeze if necessary, see page 301.
cleaning see page 58. z Fit the number plates if necessary.
z Change engine oil, see page 300.
z Check antifreeze and corrosion
protection, see page 301.
z Check the coolant level, top up with
antifreeze if necessary, see page 301.
z Empty windscreen wash system and
headlight wash system.
z Increase tyre pressure to value specified
for full load, see page 337.
308 Technical data
Technical data
Vehicle documents,
identification plate............................ 308 Vehicle documents, Information on identification plate:
Vehicle identification data.................. 309 identification plate 1 Manufacturer
Coolant, brake fluid, oils ..................... 309 The technical data is determined in 2 Type approval number
Engine data.......................................... 310 accordance with European Community 3 Vehicle identification number
Performance......................................... 312 standards. We reserve the right to make 4 Gross vehicle weight rating
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions ...... modifications. Specifications in the vehicle
316 5 Permissible gross train weight
documents always have priority over those
Weights, payload and roof load ........ 325 given in this manual. 6 Maximum permissible front axle load
Tyres ..................................................... 337 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load
Electrical system .................................. 345 The identification plate is affixed to the 8 Vehicle-specific or country-specific
front right door frame. data
Capacities ............................................ 346
Dimensions ........................................... 347
Installation dimensions of
trailer towing equipment.................. 348
Technical data 309
Coolant, brake fluid, oils

Only use approved fluids.
Use of unsuitable fluids can cause serious
damage to the vehicle.
Engine oils
Information on engine oils is found in the
Service Booklet.
Vehicle identification data The vehicle identification number may be

The vehicle identification number is embossed on the instrument panel.
stamped on the identification plate in the Engine code and engine number: stamped
vehicle floor, on the right-hand side under on left-hand side of engine on crankcase.
a cover between the drivers door and seat.
310 Technical data
Engine data
Sales designation 1.4 1.6 1.6 1.8 VXR
Engine identifier code Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 20 LEH
Number of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4
3
Piston displacement (cm ) 1364 1598 1598 1796 1998
Brake horse power (kW) 66 85 132 103 177
at rpm 5600 6000 5500 6300 5600
Torque (Nm) 125 155 230 1751) 320
at rpm 4000 4000 1980 to 5500 3800 4000 to 5000
Type of fuel Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol
2)
Octane requirement (RON)
unleaded 95 (S)3) 4) 95 (S)3) 95 (S)3) 95 (S)3) 95 (S)3)7)
or unleaded 98 (SP)3) 98 (SP)3) 98 (SP)3) 98 (SP)3) 98 (SP)3)
or unleaded 91 (N)3) 91 (N)3)4) 5) 91 (N)3)6) 91 (N)3)6)
Max. permissible engine speed,
continuous operation (rpm)
approx. 6200 6500 6500 6800 6400
Oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
1)
For versions with automatic transmission 170 Nm.
2)
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. unleaded DIN EN 228; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
3)
Knock control system automatically adjusts ignition timing according to type of fuel used (octane number).
4)
Use of 91 RON fuel reduces power and torque.
5)
The use of fuel with an octane number of 91 RON is not permitted.
6)
If no unleaded Premiun fuel is available, 91 RON can be used to avoid high engine load or full load as well as for driving in mountainous terrain with
a caravan/ trailer load or high payload.
7)
Use of 95 RON fuel reduces power and torque. Slight increase in fuel consumption.
Technical data 311
Engine data
Sales designation 1.7 CDTI 1.9 CDTI 1.9 CDTI
Engine identifier code Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
3
Piston displacement (cm ) 1686 1910 1910
Brake horse power (kW) 74 88 110
at rpm 4400 3500 4000
Torque (Nm) 240 280 320
at rpm 2300 2000 to 2750 2000 to 2750
Type of fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel
1) 2) 2)
Cetane requirement (CN) 49 (D) 49 (D) 49 (D)2)
Max. permissible engine speed,
continuous operation (rpm)
approx. 5100 to 5200 5020 to 5180 5020 to 5180
Oil consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6
1)
Standard high-quality fuels, e.g. Diesel DIN EN 590; value printed in bold: recommended fuel.
2)
A lower value is possible with winter fuels.
312 Technical data
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), 5-door Hatchback
1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER
Engine
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission 111/178 191 137/221 129/208
Easytronic 110/176 192
Automatic transmission 117/188
Engine1) Z 20 LEH Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH

Maximum speed2)
Manual transmission 143/230 112/180 121/194 129/2083)
Easytronic
1)
2)
The maximum speed indicated is achievable at kerbweight (without driver) plus 200 kg payload. Optional equipment could reduce the specified
maximum speed of the vehicle.
3)
The maximum speed is limited electronically.
Technical data 313
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), 3-door Hatchback
Engine
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission 112/180 120/193 139/223 130/210
Easytronic 111/178 121/194

Maximum speed2)
Manual transmission 152/244 113/182 122/196 130/2103)
Easytronic
1)
2)
3)
314 Technical data
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), Estate
Engine
2)
Maximum speed
Easytronic 119/192
Engine1) Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH

Maximum speed2)
Manual transmission 112/180 120/193 129/2073)
Easytronic
1)
2)
3)
Technical data 315
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), Van
1)
Engine Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
2)
Maximum speed
Manual transmission 111/178 119/191 112/180 120/193 129/207
Easytronic 119/192
Performance
(approx. mph / km/h), TwinTop
Engine1) Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 19 DTH
2)
Maximum speed
Easytronic 120/193
1)
2)
316 Technical data
Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions The directive is oriented to actual driving The figures given must not be taken as a
Directive 80/1268/EEC (last modified practices: Urban driving is rated at guarantee for the actual fuel consumption
by 2004/3/EC) has applied for the approx. 1/3 and off-road driving with of a particular vehicle.
measurement of fuel consumption approx. 2/3 (urban and extra-urban All values are based on the EU base model
since 1996. consumption). Cold starts and acceleration with standard equipment.
phases are also taken into consideration.
The calculation of fuel consumption as
The specification of CO2 emission is also a specified by directive 2004/3/EC takes
constituent of the directive. account of the vehicles kerbweight,
ascertained in accordance with these
regulations. Optional extras may result in
slightly higher fuel consumption and CO2
emission levels than those quoted.
To convert l/100 km into mpg, divide 282
by number of litres/100 km.
Saving fuel, protecting the environment,
see page 200.
Technical data 317
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Hatch 5-door (up to tyre width of 205 mm1))
Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 18 XER Z 17 DTH
Manual transmission/Easytronic/Automatic
transmission
urban 8.0/ 7.7/ 8.7/ 8.5/ 9.9//10.5 6.4//
extra-urban 5.0/ 4.9/ 5.2/ 5.0/ 5.8// 6.2 4.2//
total 6.1/ 5.9/ 6.5/ 6.3/ 7.3// 7.8 5.0//
CO2 146/ 142/ 156/ 151/ 175// 187 135//
1)
On engine Z 17 DTH with Easytronic up to tyre width 195 mm.
2)
318 Technical data
Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER
transmission
urban 8.2/ 7.9/ 8.9/ 8.7/ 10.3// 10.1//10.7
extra-urban 5.2/ 5.1/ 5.4/ 5.2/ 6.2// 6.0// 6.4
total 6.3/ 6.1/ 6.7/ 6.5/ 7.7// 7.5// 8.0
CO2 151/ 146/ 161/ 156/ 185// 180// 192

transmission
urban 6.5// 7.4// 9.7 7.4//
extra-urban 4.3// 4.9// 5.4 4.9//
total 5.1// 5.8// 7.0 5.8//
CO2 138// 157// 189 157//
1)
For Z 17 DTH engine - tyre width up to 195 mm.
2)
Technical data 319
transmission
urban 8.0/ 7.7/ 8.7/ 8.5/ 9.9//10.4 6.4//
extra-urban 5.0/ 4.9/ 5.2/ 5.0/ 5.8// 6.1 4.2//
total 6.1/ 5.9/ 6.5/ 6.3/ 7.3// 7.7 5.0//
CO2 146/ 142/ 156/ 151/ 175// 185 135//
1)
2)
320 Technical data
transmission
urban 8.2/ 7.9/ 8.9/ 8.7/ 10.3// 10.1//10.6
extra-urban 5.2/ 5.1/ 5.4/ 5.2/ 6.2// 6.0// 6.3
total 6.3/ 6.1/ 6.7/ 6.5/ 7.7// 7.5// 7.9
CO2 151/ 146/ 161/ 156/ 185// 180// 190

transmission
urban 13.0// 6.5// 7.4// 9.6 7.4//
extra-urban 7.0// 4.3// 4.9// 5.3 4.9//
total 9.2// 5.1// 5.8// 6.9 5.8//
CO2 221// 138// 157// 186 157//
1)
For Z 20 LEH engine - tyre width up to 235 mm.
2)
Technical data 321
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (up to tyre width of 205 mm1))
transmission
urban 8.0// 8.8/ 8.6/ 10.0//10.5 6.4//
extra-urban 5.0// 5.3/ 5.1/ 5.9// 6.2 4.2//
total 6.1// 6.6/ 6.4/ 7.4// 7.8 5.0//
CO2 146// 158/ 154/ 178// 187 135//
1)
2)
322 Technical data
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Estate (up to tyre width of 225 mm)
transmission
urban 8.2// 9.0/ 8.8/ 10.3// 10.2//10.7
extra-urban 5.2// 5.5/ 5.3/ 6.2// 6.1// 6.4
total 6.3// 6.8/ 6.6/ 7.7// 7.6// 8.0
CO2 151// 163/ 158/ 185// 182// 192

transmission
urban 6.5// 7.5// 9.7 7.5//
extra-urban 4.3// 5.0// 5.4 5.0//
total 5.1// 5.9// 7.0 5.9//
CO2 138// 159// 189 159//
1)
Technical data 323
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Van (up to tyre width of 205 mm1))
Engine2) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 17 DTH
transmission 8.0// 8.8/ 8.6/ 6.4//
urban 5.0// 5.3/ 5.1/ 4.2//
extra-urban 6.1// 6.6/ 6.4/ 5.0//
total 146// 158/ 154/ 135//
CO2
1)
2)
324 Technical data
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), Van (up to tyre width of 225 mm)
Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
transmission
urban 8.2// 9.0/ 8.8/ 6.5// 7.4// 9.7 7.4//
extra-urban 5.2// 5.5/ 5.3/ 4.3// 4.9// 5.4 4.9//
total 6.3// 6.8/ 6.6/ 5.1// 5.8// 7.0 5.8//
CO2 151// 163/ 158/ 138// 157// 189 157//
Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 km), CO2 emissions (approx. g/km), TwinTop (up to tyre width of 225 mm)
Engine1) Z 16 XER Z 16 LET Z 18 XER Z 19 DTH
transmission
urban 9.1// 10.5// 10.3//10.8 7.6//
extra-urban 5.6// 6.4// 6.2// 6.5 5.1//
total 6.9// 7.9// 7.7// 8.1 6.0//
CO2 166// 190// 185// 194 160//
1)
Technical data 325
Weights, payload and roof load The combined total of front and rear axle Roof load
The payload is the difference between loads must not exceed the permissible The permissible roof load is 75 kg and
the permitted gross vehicle weight gross vehicle weight. For example, if the 100 kg for caravan with roof railing. The
(see identification plate, page 308) and the front axle is bearing its maximum roof load is the combined weight of the
EC kerbweight. permissible load, the rear axle can only roof rack and the load.
bear a load that is equal to the gross No roof load is permitted with the Astra
To calculate the kerbweight, enter the data vehicle weight minus the front axle load.
for your vehicle below: TwinTop or vehicles with a panoramic
z kerbweight from table 1, With a connected trailer and full load on window.
page 327 + .............. kg the towing vehicle including all passengers, Driving hints, see page 198. Roof racks,
in the Hatch the maximum permitted rear caravan and trailer towing, see page 232.
z Additional weight for axle load (see rating plate or vehicle
equipment versions documents) may be exceeded by 65 kg
from table 2, page 334 + .............. kg (5-door) or 70 kg (3-door), and the
z Weight of heavy maximum gross vehicle weight by 45 kg.
accessories from In the Estate, the maximum permitted rear
table 3, page 337 + .............. kg axle load may be exceeded by 60 kg and
Total = .............. kg the maximum gross vehicle weight by
is the EC kerbweight. 30 kg. If the maximum permitted rear axle
load is exceeded, a top speed of 60 mph
Optional equipment and accessories (100 km/h) applies. If lower top speeds are
increase the kerbweight, which means that stipulated nationally when towing a trailer
the payload will also change slightly. these must be observed.
Note the weights given in the vehicle See the identification plate or vehicle
documents. documents for permissible axle loads.
326 Technical data
Table 1, kerbweight in kg1), Hatch 5-door

Model Engine2) Manual transmission Easytronic Automatic transmission
Astra Z 14 XEP 1240 1240
Z 16 XER 1270 1270
Z 18 XER 1278 1303
Z 17 DTH 1365
Z 19 DT 1395 1425
Z 19 DTH 1393
1)
According to EC Directive, including assumed weights for driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (tank 90% full).
2)
Technical data 327

Astra with air Z 14 XEP 1260 1260
conditioning system
or climate control Z 16 XER 1290 1290
system Z 16 LET 1355
Z 18 XER 1298 1323
Z 17 DTH 1380
Z 19 DT 1410 1440
Z 19 DTH 1408
1)
2)
328 Technical data

Astra Z 14 XEP 1220 1220
Z 16 XER 1250 1250
Z 18 XER 1265 1278
Z 17 DTH 1345
Z 19 DT 1375 1393
Z 19 DTH 1390
1)
2)
Technical data 329

Astra with air Z 14 XEP 1240 1240
conditioning system
Z 18 XER 1285 1298
Z 20 LEH 1393
Z 17 DTH 1360
Z 19 DT 1390 1408
Z 19 DTH 1405
1)
2)
330 Technical data
Table 1, kerbweight in kg1), Estate

Astra Z 14 XEP 1278
Z 16 XER 1315 1315
Z 18 XER 1325 1350
Z 17 DTH 1393
Z 19 DT 1435 1465
Z 19 DTH 1450
1)
2)
Technical data 331
Table 1, kerbweight in kg1), Estate

Astra with air Z 14 XEP 1298
conditioning system
Z 18 XER 1345 1370
Z 17 DTH 1408
Z 19 DT 1450 1480
Z 19 DTH 1465
1)
2)
332 Technical data
Table 1, kerbweight in kg1), Van

Astra Z 14 XEP 1235
Z 16 XER 1270 1270
Z 17 DTH 1365
Z 19 DT 1385 1420
Z 19 DTH 1395
Astra with air Z 14 XEP 1250
conditioning system
system Z 17 DTH 1380
Z 19 DT 1400 1435
Z 19 DTH 1410
1)
2)
Technical data 333
Table 1, kerbweight in kg1), TwinTop

Astra Z 16 XER 1495 1495
Z 18 XER 1500 1503
Z 19 DTH 1613
Astra with air Z 16 XER 1515 1515
conditioning
system or climate Z 16 LET 1575
control system Z 18 XER 1520 1523
Z 19 DTH 1628
1)
2)
334 Technical data
Table 2, additional weight for equipment versions in kg

Hatch
2)
Express / Life
Club / Breeze 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
Design / Elite 12 12 12 12
SRi / Sxi 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5
VXR2)

2)
Express / Life
Club / Breeze 2.9 2.9 2.9
Design / Elite 12 12 12
SRi / Sxi 24.5 12.6 12.6
VXR2)
1)
2)
Values not available at time of printing.
Technical data 335

Estate
2)
Express / Life
Club / Breeze 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9
Design / Elite 12 12 12 12
SRi / Sxi 24.5 24.5 24.5 24.5
VXR2)

2)
Express / Life
Club / Breeze 2.9 2.9 2.9
Design / Elite 12 12 12
SRi / Sxi 24.5 12.6 24.5
VXR2)
1)
2)
336 Technical data

Van
Engine1) Z 14 XEP Z 16 XER Z 17 DTH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH
2)
Express / Life
Club / Breeze
Design / Elite
Sport 19.3 10.5 10.5 10.5 10.5
2)
VXR
Table 3, heavy accessories in kg

Accessories Sunroof Towing equipment Split rear seat bench
Weight 23 21 (except TwinTop) 20 (Estate)
26 (TwinTop) 9 (Hatch 3/5-door)
1)
2)
Technical data 337
Tyres Winter tyres are permitted on the Astra On vehicles with alloy wheels 3 the spare
Not all tyres available on the market VXR only on special Vauxhall-approved wheel may have a steel rim.
currently meet the structural requirements. alloy wheels. The spare wheel may be fitted with a
We recommend that you consult a Further information, see page 231. smaller tyre1) and smaller wheel than the
Vauxhall Authorised repairer concerning wheels fitted to the vehicle.
suitable tyre makes. Tyre chains 3
Tyre chains may be used on the front Tyre pressure in bar / psi2)
These tyres have undergone special tests wheels only. The specified tyre pressures are valid for
to establish their reliability, safety and cold tyres. The increased tyre pressure
specific suitability for Vauxhall vehicles. We recommend the use of fine-link snow
chains which amount to max 10 mm on the resulting from extensive driving must not
Despite continuous market monitoring, we be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on
are unable to assess these attributes for tread and tyre inner wall with chain lock.
the following pages apply to both summer
other tyres, even if they have been granted Tyre chains are not permitted on the and winter tyres.
approval by the relevant authorities or in emergency wheel 115/70 R 16 and on
some other form. tyres of size 225/45 R 17, 225/40 R 18, Always inflate the spare wheel 3 to the tyre
225/40 ZR 18 and 235/35 ZR 19. pressure for full load see tables on
Further information, see page 225. following pages.
Winter tyres 3 Tyre chains are permitted on tyres
size 215/45 R 17 only if the vehicle is Temporary spare wheel 3 tyre pressure
Tyres of size 215/45 R 17, 225/45 R 17, see tables on following pages.
factory-fitted with 18" wheels.
225/40 R 18, 225/40 ZR 18 and
Further information, see page 232. In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring
235/35 ZR 19 are not to be used as
system 3 there is an adapter in the valve
winter tyres.
Wheels cap key. Screw adapter to valve before
Tyre sizes 215/45 R 17 are permitted as Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm. attaching tyre pressure gauge, see
winter tyres only if the vehicle is factory- page 227.
fitted with 18" wheels. Spare wheel 3
Further information, see pages 225 to 232.
If you use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel Depending on the version, the spare wheel
may still be fitted with a summer tyre. If you may take the form of a temporary spare
use the spare wheel the vehicles handling wheel 3: vehicle driveability may be
may be altered. Obtain a replacement for altered by use of the spare wheel. Obtain a
the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as
have the wheel balanced and fitted to the possible, and have the wheel balanced
vehicle. and fitted to the vehicle.
1)
Country-specific version: The spare wheel is
only to be used as a temporary spare wheel.
2)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi.
338 Technical data
(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure ECO1) Tyre pressure for
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up to loaded with up to full load
3 persons 3 people
Engine2) Tyres Front Rear Front Rear Front Rear
Z 14 XEP 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.9/42
195/60 R 15
195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.5/36
205/55 R 16
Z 16 XER 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.9/42
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.5/36
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.8/41 3.1/45
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61
(temporary spare)3)
1)
To achieve the smallest amount of fuel consumption possible. Not for use with run-flat tyres.
2)
3)
1) For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 250.
Technical data 339
(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for

Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) for load of up to ECO1) loaded with full load
3 persons up to 3 people
Z 18 XER 185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.9/42
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.5/36
205/55 R 16
225/45 R 17 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
Z 20 LEH 205/50 R 173), 2.4/35 2.4/35 2.5/36 2.9/42
225/40 ZR 18,
235/35 ZR 19,
225/45 R 17 4)
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61
(temporary spare)5)
1)
2)
3)
Only permitted as winter tyres.
4)
To guarantee a correct speed display, the electronic speedometer must be reprogrammed.
5)
1)
1 bar corresponds to 100 kPa / 14.5 psi. For notes on the temporary spare wheel, see page 250.
340 Technical data
(ctd.) Hatch Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for

Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 2.6/38 3.0/44
225/40 R 18
Z 19 DT, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
Z 19 DTH 225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.8/41 3.1/45
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61
(temporary spare)3)
1)
2)
3)
1)
Technical data 341
(ctd.) Estate Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for

Z 14 XEP 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38
205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.9/42
195/60 R 15
Z 16 XER 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.9/42
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.8/41 3.1/45
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61
(temporary spare)3)
1)
2)
3)
342 Technical data
(ctd.) Estate Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for

Z 18 XER 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.9/42
195/60 R 15,
215/45 R 17,
225/40 R 18
Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 153), 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 2.6/38 3.0/44
225/40 R 18
Z 19 DT, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
Z 19 DTH 225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.8/41 3.1/45
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61
(temporary spare)3)
1)
2)
3)
Technical data 343
(ctd.) Van Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for

for load of up to ECO1) loaded with full load
Tyre pressure in bar / psi1) 3 persons up to 2 people
Z 14 XEP 195/65 R 15, 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.1/30 2.6/38
205/55 R 16
185/65 R 15, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.9/42
195/60 R 15
Z 17 DTH 195/65 R 15, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
205/55 R 16,
225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.5/36 2.3/33 2.6/38 3.0/44
225/40 R 18
Z 19 DT, 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.9/42
Z 19 DTH 225/45 R 17
215/45 R 17, 2.7/39 2.5/36 2.8/41 3.1/45
225/40 R 18
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61
(temporary spare)3)
1)
2)
3)
1)
344 Technical data
(ctd.) TwinTop Tyre pressure Tyre pressure Tyre pressure for

Z 16 XER, 205/55 R 16, 2.1/30 2.1/30 2.5/36 2.5/36 2.2/32 2.6/38
Z 18 XER 225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.4/35 2.8/41
Z 16 LET 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.4/35 2.8/41
225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 2.6/38 3.0/44
Z 19 DTH 205/55 R 16, 2.3/33 2.1/30 2.4/35 2.8/41
225/45 R 17
225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 2.6/38 3.0/44
all T 115/70 R 16 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61 4.2/61
(temporary spare)3)
1)
2)
3)
1)
Technical data 345
Electrical system
Battery Voltage 12 Volt
Amp hours 36 Ah / 44 Ah 3 / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 /
66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 / 72 Ah 3
Battery for remote control of central locking
system and electronic key of Open&Start system CR 20 32
346 Technical data
Capacities
(approx. litres)
Fuel tank (nominal content) 52 52 52 52
Engine oil with filter change 3.5 4.5 4.5 4.5
between MIN and MAX on oil dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Container for windscreen wash system 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4
with headlight wash system 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0

Fuel tank (nominal content) 52 52 52
Engine oil with filter change 5.0 4.3 4.3
between MIN and MAX on oil dipstick 1.0 1.0 1.0
Container for windscreen wash system 2.4 2.4 2.4
with headlight wash system 4.0 4.0 4.0
1)
Technical data 347
Dimensions
(approx. mm)
Hatch 5-door Hatch 3-door Estate Van TwinTop
Overall length 4249 4290 4515 4515 4476
Width 1753 1753 1753 1753 1759
Width with two exterior mirrors 2032 2032 2032 2032 2021
1)
Overall height 1460 1435 1500 1500 1411
Length of luggage compartment floor 819 819 1085 1825 805
Luggage compartment width 944 944 1088 1103 734
Height of luggage compartment opening 614 555 766 775
Wheelbase 2614 2614 2703 2703 2614
2)
Turning circle diameter 11.20 11.20 11.50 11.50 11.20
1)
kerbweight with driver.
2)
In metres.
348 Technical data
trailer towing equipment
with detachable coupling ball
bar, Hatch1)
All dimensions refer to factory-fitted
towing equipment.
Dimension mm
A 342.9
B 83
C 513.4
D 488.6
E 211.4
F 94.3
G 160
9 Warning
Only use towing equipment approved for
your vehicle. We recommend entrusting
fitting of towing equipment at a later
date to a workshop.
1)
Do not mount towing equipment to vehicles
with Z 20 LEH engine. Sales designation,
see page 310.
Technical data 349
trailer towing equipment
bar, Estate, Van
All dimensions refer to factory-fitted
towing equipment.
Dimension mm
A 84.0
B 570.0
C 515.0
D 93.5
E 173.0
F 307.6
G 158.0
H 292.6
9 Warning
date to a workshop.
350 Technical data
towing equipment
bar, Astra TwinTop
All measurements refer to Vauxhall-
approved towing equipment.
Dimension mm
A 68.8
B 570.0
C 515.0
D 485.0
E 93.5
F 288.0
G 245.0
9 Warning
date to a workshop.
Technical data 351
352 Index
Index Automatic transmission .................... 15, 16

Automatic mode........................ 184, 191
Brakes
ABS ..................................................... 224
A Control indicator........................ 185, 192 Brake assist ........................................ 223
Driving programme ................... 185, 192 Brake fluid.......................................... 302
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ............... 224 Fault............................................ 188, 196 Brake lights ................................ 277, 283
Accessories....................................... 90, 247 Interruption of power supply .... 189, 197 Brake servo unit................................. 198
Accessory socket ................................... 107 Kickdown.................................... 187, 194 Footbrake........................................... 223
ActiveSelect.............................................. 16 Manual mode..................................... 192 Handbrake......................................... 224
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) .. 26, 147 Selector lever......... 15, 16, 184, 191, 192 Bulb replacement .......................... 267, 269
Bulb replacement............................... 273 Winter programme .................... 186, 193 Bulbs............................................... 267, 269
Driving abroad................................... 150 Automatic transmission
Air conditioning system................. 154, 161 with ActiveSelect.................................... 16
C
Air intake ................................................ 174 Automatic wiping ............................ 12, 141 Capacities .............................................. 346
Air quality sensor................................... 169 Car Pass ................................................... 30
Air recirculation system........ 161, 165, 173 B Caravan/trailer towing.................. 198, 237
Air vents ................................................. 156 Battery.................................... 199, 306, 345 Cargo box ................................................ 81
Airbags ..................................................... 92 Interruption of Catalytic converter........................ 209, 242
Alarm system ........................................... 46 power supply...................... 183, 189, 197 CDC (Continuous Damping Control) .. 115,
Alternator ............................................... 115 Battery discharge protection ............... 150 211
Antenna................................. 140, 151, 289 Before starting off ................................... 16 Central locking system............................ 40
Anti-dazzle interior mirror....................... 51 Belt force limiters ..................................... 86 Cetane numbers .................................... 311
Antifreeze ....................................... 300, 301 Belt tensioners ......................................... 86 Changing the battery
Antifreeze protection .................... 301, 305 Bleeding, diesel fuel system.................. 241 Remote control ............................ 34, 345
Anti-knock quality of fuel...................... 202 Board information display............ 122, 128 Changing tyre/wheel type .................... 225
Anti-theft locking system ........................ 41 Bonnet .................................................... 241 Changing wheels................................... 252
Towing equipment............................. 235 Boot, see Luggage compartment.... 44, 71 Chassis number, see vehicle identification
Anti-theft protection ............................... 18 Brake assist ............................................ 223 number................................................. 309
Aquaplaning .......................................... 230 Brake fluid .............................................. 309 Check control................................... 22, 138
Armrest ............................................. 70, 110 Brake system.......................................... 222 Child restraint system ............................. 90
Ashtray ........................................... 108, 150 Child safety locks ........................ 49, 52, 53
Aspherical exterior mirror ....................... 49 Cigarette lighter ............................ 107, 150
Automatic air recirculation mode 169, 173 Climate control ...................................... 154
Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror .... 51 Climate control system ................. 155, 168
Clock....................................................... 120
Index 353
Clutch operation .................................... 199 Courtesy light......................................... 148 E

CO2 emissions........................................ 316 Bulb replacement .............................. 287
Easy Load ................................................ 82
Cold start................................................ 199 Cruise control ......................................... 213
Easytronic ................................................ 15
Colour information display .. 122, 130, 134 Curtain airbags........................................ 97
Driving programmes ......................... 179
Continuous Damping Curve lighting .................................. 26, 147
Fault ................................................... 182
Control (CDC) ............................... 115, 211
Contrast.................................................. 133
D Interruption of power supply ............ 183
Dashboard, see Instrument panel ........... 7 Kickdown............................................ 180
Control indicators .................... 10, 112, 113
Data.................................................. 30, 308 Selector lever........................................ 15
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ........... 225
Date................................................ 124, 127 Starting off ......................................... 178
Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) ... 118,
Daytime running lights.......................... 143 Winter programme............................ 180
147
Decommissioning .................................. 307 Economical driving................................ 200
Airbag........................................... 98, 105
Deflation detection system (DDS).. 25, 218 Electric sunroof ........................................ 54
Belt tensioners...................................... 87
Demisting and defrosting Electrical exterior mirrors ........................... 6
Brake system ...................................... 224
Windows ............................................. 160 Electrical system ............................ 306, 345
Cruise control ..................................... 214
With climate control system ............. 171 Electro-hydraulic
DDS ..................................................... 219
With the air conditioning power assisted steering ...................... 198
Deflation detection system ............... 219
system......................................... 163, 167 Electronic components.......................... 306
Engine electronics .............................. 206
Diesel ...................................................... 311 Electronic immobiliser ............................. 31
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) .... 210
Diesel fuel filter ...................................... 300 Electronic Stability Program ................. 210
Exhaust ............................................... 206
Diesel fuel system .......................... 241, 300 Engine code ........................... 309, 310, 311
IDS+ ............................................. 212, 213
Diesel particle filter................ 118, 157, 199 Engine control indicator ....................... 206
Immobiliser ........................................... 31
Dimensions............................................. 347 Engine data ................................... 310, 311
Parking distance sensor .................... 216
Dipped beam........................................... 11 Engine oil ............................................... 298
Transmission .............................. 185, 192
Bulb replacement ...................... 270, 273 Engine oil change.................................. 299
Tyre pressure monitoring system ..... 221
Display............................................ 121, 122 Engine oil consumption ........................ 298
Coolant ........................................... 300, 309
Documents ............................................. 308 Engine oil filter ....................................... 300
Coolant level .......................................... 301
Door handle lighting ............................. 149 Engine oil level............................... 116, 298
Coolant temperature............................. 115
Door locks ........................................ 30, 291 Engine oil pressure ................................ 113
Cooled glove compartment.................. 156
Doors ...................................................... 115 Engine speed ......................................... 199
Cooling ........................................... 162, 167
Door-to-door light function .................. 148 Engine wash........................................... 292
Correcting time .............................. 126, 132
Driving abroad .............................. 202, 295 Entry lighting ......................................... 149
Coupling socket load............................. 238
Headlights.......................................... 150 Environmental protection ..................... 300
Driving hints ........................................... 198 ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ....... 210
354 Index
Exhaust control indicator ...................... 206 Fuel system, diesel................................. 241 Headlights .................................................. 7
Exhaust gases ........................................ 207 Fuse extractor........................................ 261 Daytime running lights...................... 143
Exhaust system ...................................... 207 Fuses....................................................... 259 Driving abroad .................................. 150
Exterior lights ................................. 116, 143 Fog lights ........................................... 145
Exterior mirrors............................. 6, 49, 157
G Reverse lights..................................... 145
Gears ........................................................ 14 Warning device.................................. 140
F Generator, see Alternator..................... 115 Heated exterior mirrors .................. 13, 157
Fan.................................................. 158, 297 Genuine Vauxhall Parts Heated front seats ................................ 157
Filling station and Accessories ................................... 297 Heated rear window ....................... 13, 157
Capacities........................................... 346 Glasses compartment ........................... 111 Heating .......................................... 154, 159
Engine oil level ................................... 298 Glove compartment .............................. 110 Seats ................................................... 157
Fuel .................................... 202, 310, 311 Cooled ................................................ 156 With climate control system ............. 170
Opening the bonnet .......................... 241 Glove compartment lighting ................ 149 with the air conditioning
Tyre pressure.............................. 201, 337 Bulb replacement .............................. 288 system ........................................ 163, 167
Vehicle data ....................................... 309 Graphical information Height adjustment
Windscreen wash system .................. 305 display .................................. 122, 130, 134 Seat belts ............................................. 88
First-aid kit (cushion)............................. 247 Gross vehicle weight.............................. 325 Steering wheel ........................................ 7
Flat tyre .................................................. 256 Gross vehicle weight rating .................. 325 High-pressure cleaners ......... 236, 291, 293
FlexOrganizer .......................................... 80 Hill Start Assist....................................... 223
Fog lights................................................ 145
H Horn.......................................................... 12
Bulb replacement............................... 276 Halogen headlight system ................... 269
Fog tail light ........................................... 145 Bulb replacement .............................. 269 I
Bulb replacement....................... 277, 283 Driving abroad................................... 150 Identification plate................................ 308
Folding roof, see TwinTop ...................... 56 Handbrake....................................... 18, 224 IDS+ (Interactive Driving System). 209, 211
Folding the backrest ............................... 66 Hazard warning lights .................... 11, 146 Ignition logic .................................. 127, 134
Footbrake............................................... 223 Head restraints .................................. 21, 69 Ignition system .............................. 297, 306
Front airbags ........................................... 93 Head rests................................................ 21 Ignition, see Starter switch ................... 6, 7
Front passenger airbag .......................... 93 Headlight flash ...................................... 144 Immobiliser .............................................. 31
Fuel ........................................ 202, 310, 311 Headlight range adjustment........ 146, 269 Information display............................... 122
Fuel consumption . 200, 202, 316, 321, 324 Headlight switch........................ 7, 143, 144 Infotainment system ............................. 151
Fuel filler cap.......................................... 203 Headlight wash system........... 13, 142, 305 Inspection system.................................. 296
Fuel filter................................................. 300 Instrument display ................................ 119
Fuel gauge ............................................. 119
Fuel level................................................. 119
Index 355
Instrument illumination ......................... 148 Locking doors .......................................... 40 Misted windows ............................. 160, 171
Bulb replacement............................... 288 Locking from the inside .......................... 42 Mobile telephone .................................. 152
Instrument panel ....................................... 7 Locks....................................................... 291 Motorway lighting ........................... 26, 147
Instruments ............................................ 112 Lubricants ...................................... 298, 309
Interactive Driving System (IDS+) . 209, 211 Luggage compartment
N
Interior mirror ....................................... 5, 51 Blind...................................................... 82 Neutral, transmission .............................. 14
Interruption of power supply ........ 136, 139 Bulb replacement .............................. 288 Number plate lighting .......................... 286
Easytronic ........................................... 183 FlexOrganizer ...................................... 80 Number plate lights
Selector lever lock ...................... 189, 197 Grille...................................................... 79 Bulb replacement .............................. 286
ISOFIX ....................................................... 91 Lighting .............................................. 149 Number plates....................................... 307
Loading ................................ 84, 237, 325
J Locking ................................................. 44
O
Jack......................................................... 251 Safety net ....................................... 78, 79 Octane numbers............................ 202, 310
Jump leads ............................................. 243 Luggage compartment cover ................ 76 Odometer, see Trip odometer.............. 120
Lumbar support....................................... 66 Oil change ............................................. 300
K Oil consumption .................................... 298
Kerbweight................................... 327 - 333 M Oil filter change..................................... 300
Keys .......................................................... 30 Main beam....................................... 11, 144 Oil level................................................... 298
Extending ............................................. 30 Bulb replacement ...................... 271, 273 Oil pressure ............................................ 113
Ignition lock ........................................ 6, 7 Control indicator................................ 117 Oils.................................................. 298, 309
Locking doors....................................... 40 Maintenance Open&Start system ............. 17, 24, 34, 112
Remove................................................. 18 Air conditioning system..................... 175 Operating temperature ........................ 199
Replacement ........................................ 30 Antifreeze protection ........................ 301 Outside temperature gauge ................ 123
Starting the engine ...................... 6, 7, 17 Brake fluid .......................................... 302 Overrun .......................................... 199, 201
Brakes ................................................. 222
L Catalytic converter ............................ 209
P
Language selection ....................... 127, 132 Engine oil.................................... 298, 300 Paintwork damage................................ 290
Lashing eyes ............................................ 80 Fuel consumption .............................. 201 Panoramic windscreen...................... 26, 53
Leather trim ........................................... 291 Tyre pressure...................................... 227 Parking ............................................. 18, 215
Level control system.............................. 217 Tyres ........................................... 228, 229 Parking distance sensor........................ 215
Light switch ................................................ 7 Windscreen wiper .............................. 303 Parking lights..................................... 7, 143
Lighting ...................................... 7, 116, 143 Manual transmission, see Transmission 14 Bulb replacement ...................... 272, 275
Driving abroad................................... 150 Mechanical anti-theft locking ................ 41 Parking the vehicle.................................. 18
Loading ......................... 237, 321, 322, 324 Mirrors ............................................ 5, 49, 51 Pedals..................................................... 199
356 Index
Performance........................................... 316 Reverse lights Service interval display ......................... 296

Petrol .............................................. 202, 310 Bulb replacement ...................... 277, 283 Service work ........................................... 296
Pinking .................................................... 202 Rollover protection system ..................... 59 Service, maintenance............................ 294
Pollen filter ............................................. 174 Roof lining .......................................... 26, 53 Side airbags............................................. 95
Power assisted steering, see Roof load......... 84, 198, 201, 321, 322, 324 Signal system........................................... 12
electro-hydraulic power Roof rack ................................ 201, 232, 325 Silencer, see Exhaust system ................ 207
assisted steering .................................. 198 Roof racks ...................................... 201, 325 Spare fuses ............................................ 260
Preheating........................................ 17, 118 Run-flat tyres ......................................... 230 Spare keys................................................ 30
Preheating switch .................................... 17 Running-in Spare wheel ........................... 249, 250, 252
Pushing, towing ..................................... 242 Brakes ................................................. 222 Speed ............................................. 200, 201
Fuel consumption ...................... 200, 201
Q S Speedometer ......................................... 119
Quickheat .............................. 159, 166, 170 Safeguard against Sport mode ............................................ 115
unauthorised use ........................... 6, 7, 19 Sport programme............................ 24, 212
R Safety accessories ........................... 90, 247 Starter switch ......................................... 6, 7
Radio .............................................. 140, 151 Safety net........................................... 78, 79 Starting the engine ... 6, 7, 17, 31, 177, 242
Radio equipment (CB)........................... 152 Save energy - more miles ..................... 198 Self-help ............................................. 242
Radio reception ............................. 140, 151 Saving energy ........................................ 200 Steam-jet cleaners ................ 236, 291, 293
Rain sensor............................... 12, 141, 303 Seat adjustment .................................. 3, 64 Steering column lock....................... 6, 7, 18
Reading lights ........................................ 149 Seat belts ......................................... 88, 291 Steering wheel adjustment ........................ 7
Rear light cluster.................................... 143 Seat height adjustment ...................... 4, 65 Steering wheel remote control ....... 23, 151
Bulb replacement....................... 277, 283 Seat occupancy recognition................... 99 Stowage compartments ....................... 110
Rear screen wiper .................................. 142 Seat position ............................................ 67 Sun visors ........................... 26, 53, 111, 149
Rear window wash Seats ............................................... 3, 64, 66 Sunblind ................................................... 54
system............................ 13, 142, 289, 305 Heated................................................ 157 Sunroof..................................................... 54
Recommissioning ................................... 307 Selector lever.......................... 177, 184, 191 System settings.............................. 126, 131
Refuelling................................................ 203 Selector lever lock.............. 15, 16, 184, 191
Fuel filler cap...................................... 203 Self-diagnosis .................................... 87, 98 T
Remote control Self-help ................................................. 241 Tables..................................................... 110
Central locking system ........ 2, 24, 32, 36 Automatic transmission .................... 189 Tachometer ........................................... 119
Steering wheel.............................. 23, 151 Electric sunroof .................................... 55 Tail lights................................................ 143
Replacement keys ................................... 30 Information display ........................... 124 Bulb replacement ...................... 277, 283
Remote control .............................. 33, 39 Tailgate.................................................... 44
Index 357
Tank Trip odometer........................................ 120

Fuel gauge ......................................... 119 Triple information display............. 122, 124
V
Technical data ....................................... 308 TSA (Trailer Stability Assist).................. 239 Valve cap key ................................ 227, 337
Telephone, see Mobile telephone ........ 152 Turn signal lights ..................................... 11 Vauxhall alarm system ................... 46, 306
Temperature regulation................ 158, 170 Turn signals Vauxhall Full Size airbag system ........... 93
Temporary spare wheel ................ 232, 250 Bulb replacement .............. 276, 277, 283 Vauxhall service .................................... 294
Tightening torque.......................... 255, 337 Twin Audio ....................................... 23, 152 Vehicle care ........................................... 289
Tilt angle TwinTop ................................................... 56 Vehicle decommissioning ..................... 307
Seats ................................................. 4, 65 Closing the roof ................................... 57 Vehicle dimensions................................ 347
Time ................................................ 124, 127 Opening the roof ................................. 56 Vehicle identification number .............. 309
Tools ....................................................... 251 Rollover protection .............................. 59 Vehicle recommissioning ...................... 307
Towing equipment ....... 233, 348, 349, 350 Warning buzzers.................................. 58 Vehicle storage...................................... 307
Towing eye ..................................... 244, 246 Wind deflector ..................................... 61 Vehicle tools .......................................... 251
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA).................. 239 Tyre chains..................................... 232, 337 Ventilation ..................... 154, 159, 166, 172
Transmission display .... 121, 176, 184, 190 Tyre condition........................................ 228
Transmission, automatic................... 15, 16 Tyre pressure .................. 25, 219, 227, 337
W
Automatic mode........................ 184, 191 Tyre pressure monitoring system ... 25, 219 Warning buzzers ................................... 140
Driving programme ................... 185, 192 Tyre repair kit ........................................ 256 Warning messages................ 125, 130, 138
Fault............................................ 188, 196 Warning triangle ................................... 247
Interruption of power supply .... 189, 197
U Wash fluid reservoir,
Kickdown .................................... 187, 194 Units of measure ........................... 127, 133 Windscreen wash system.................... 305
Selector lever ............... 15, 184, 191, 192 Unleaded fuel ........................ 202, 204, 310 Weights .................................. 321, 322, 324
Selector lever lock ................................ 15 Used oil................................................... 300 Wheels.................................................... 225
Winter programme .................... 186, 193 Wheels, tyres.......................................... 225
Transmission, Easytronic Wind deflector ......................................... 61
Driving programmes.......................... 179 Windows
Fault.................................................... 182 Demisting and
Interruption of power supply ............ 183 defrosting................... 160, 163, 167, 171
Kickdown ............................................ 180 Windscreen wash system................ 13, 142
Selector lever ................................ 15, 178 Antifreeze protection ........................ 305
Winter programme ............................ 180 Capacities .......................................... 346
Transmission, manual ............................. 14 Wash fluid reservoir........................... 305
Tread depth ........................................... 229 Windscreen wiper .................... 12, 141, 303
Trip computer .......................... 22, 128, 134
358 Index
Winter mode
Starting-off aid .................................. 180
Winter operation
Battery ................................................ 199
Coolant, antifreeze ............................ 301
Fuel consumption .............................. 201
Fuel for diesel engines....................... 202
Heating.............................. 154, 163, 167
Locks ................................................... 291
Tyre chains ................................. 232, 337
Window demisting and
defrosting ........................................... 160
Windscreen wash system,
antifreeze protection ......................... 305
Winter programme ............... 180, 186, 193
Winter tyres .................................... 231, 337
X
Xenon headlight system ......... 26, 146, 273
Bulb replacement............................... 273
Driving abroad................................... 150
Owners Manual
ASTRA
Operation, Safety and Maintenance
Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.
A ST R A
Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not
permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors
Ltd.
All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly
reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd.
All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this
manual are based on the latest production information
available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without
notice.
Edition: July 2007.
TS 1612-A-08

Astra: Owner's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Astra: Owner's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Astra: Owner's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owners Manual

Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.

Page Page Page

Control indicators A Engine electronics, gearbox T Winter programme of

Activate horn: Windscreen wiper: Automatic wiping with

To demist or defrost windows: Set automatic mode on climate Manual transmission:

To exit P, switch ignition on, operate

Easytronic 3: Automatic transmission 3:

To move from P or N, switch on ignition, Before starting off, check:

Press button again to repeat the starting

To start engine: To start engine with Open&Start

Parking the vehicle z If the vehicle is on a level surface or an

Advice when parking: That was the most important

2 Board Computer 19,5 19:36

Selection with left adjuster wheel on Trip computer 3 Check control 3

Two headphone connections are available,

Remote control on steering Twin Audio 3

Damping and steering become more direct

Open&Start system with Sport mode 3

Adaptive Forward Lighting Curve lighting Panoramic windscreen 3

Parking distance sensor 3 Cargo box 3 FlexOrganizer 3

The roof is operated with the buttons on

Luggage compartment cover, Astra TwinTop

Diesel particle filter 3

Keys, doors, windows, Replacement keys

Store personal vehicle settings in

Vauxhall alarm system 3,

Key with fixed key section

Remote control battery replacement Open&Start system 3

If the brake or clutch pedal is depressed,

The remote control has a range of approx.

InSP3 in the service display or an

z Remote control battery voltage too low

Central locking system Open&Start system with electronic key 3 To lock

Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3,

Vauxhall alarm system 3

4. Switch on Vauxhall alarm system. LED

Activation without monitoring of Light emitting diode (LED)

In the event of a fault in the remote control

Child safety locks 3 Exterior mirrors Adjust exterior mirrors electrically 3

If an electrical retracted mirror is extended

Swing in exterior mirror: For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior

Press button n again - both exterior

Press button ": all windows are opened. Note

Note Overload Fault

z The roof can be held in an intermediate Fault Rollover protection system

Fixed anti-roll bars Deployable anti-roll bars 3 Luggage compartment

Blockage of boot lid on closure 3 Wind deflector 3

Unblocking on failure of electric drive

Seats, interior Operating the seat belts..................... 88

The seat back can only be tipped forwards

Adjusting the lumbar support 3 Fold the seat backrest forwards 3

The seat backrests must not be tilted too

Adjusting the thigh support 3 on the Seat position

Armrest 3 at drivers seat Armrest 3 in back seat backrest Astra TwinTop

Folding the centre seat backrest makes it

Disengage backrest (one-piece or split 3) Fold down centre backrest 3

The three-point seat belt for the centre rear

Luggage compartment cover Estate